Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Notices © Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2005-2010 Manual Part Number No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means (including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language) without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies, Inc. as governed by United States and international copyright laws. Version 06.00.0000 Trademarks Microsoft®, MS-DOS®, Windows®, Windows 2000®, and Windows XP® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
In This Book This book is your guide to programming the 6000 Series oscilloscopes: Table 1 InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscope Models Channels Input Bandwidth 1 GHz 500 MHz 300 MHz 100 MHz 4 analog + 16 digital (mixed-signal) MSO6104A/L MSO6054A/L MSO6034A MSO6014A/L 2 analog + 16 digital (mixed-signal) MSO6102A MSO6052A MSO6032A MSO6012A 4 analog DSO6104A/L DSO6054A/L DSO6034A DSO6014A/L 2 analog DSO6102A DSO6052A DSO6032A DSO6012A The first few chapters describe how to set up
• Chapter 8, Chapter 8, “Error Messages,” starting on page 755, lists the instrument error messages that can occur while programming the oscilloscope. The command descriptions in this reference show upper and lowercase characters. For example, :AUToscale indicates that the entire command name is :AUTOSCALE. The short form, :AUT, is also accepted by the oscilloscope.
Contents In This Book 3 1 What's New What's New in Version 6.00 22 What's New in Version 5.25 25 What's New in Version 5.20 27 What's New in Version 5.15 30 What's New in Version 5.10 32 What's New in Version 5.00 33 What's New in Version 4.10 35 What's New in Version 4.00 37 What's New in Version 3.50 39 What's New in Version 3.00 41 Command Differences From 54620/54640 Series Oscilloscopes 43 2 Setting Up Step 1. Install Agilent IO Libraries Suite software Step 2.
Programming the Oscilloscope 60 Referencing the IO Library 60 Opening the Oscilloscope Connection via the IO Library 61 Initializing the Interface and the Oscilloscope 61 Using :AUToscale to Automate Oscilloscope Setup 62 Using Other Oscilloscope Setup Commands 62 Capturing Data with the :DIGitize Command 63 Reading Query Responses from the Oscilloscope 65 Reading Query Results into String Variables 66 Reading Query Results into Numeric Variables 66 Reading Definite-Length Block Query Response Data 66 Sendi
*OPT (Option Identification) 137 *RCL (Recall) 139 *RST (Reset) 140 *SAV (Save) 143 *SRE (Service Request Enable) 144 *STB (Read Status Byte) 146 *TRG (Trigger) 148 *TST (Self Test) 149 *WAI (Wait To Continue) 150 Root (:) Commands 151 :ACTivity 154 :AER (Arm Event Register) 155 :AUToscale 156 :AUToscale:AMODE 158 :AUToscale:CHANnels 159 :BLANk 160 :CDISplay 161 :DIGitize 162 :HWEenable (Hardware Event Enable Register) 164 :HWERegister:CONDition (Hardware Event Condition Register) :HWERegister[:EVENt] (Hard
:ACQuire:DAALias 198 :ACQuire:MODE 199 :ACQuire:POINts 200 :ACQuire:RSIGnal 201 :ACQuire:SEGMented:ANALyze 202 :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt 203 :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex 204 :ACQuire:SRATe 207 :ACQuire:TYPE 208 :BUS Commands 210 :BUS:BIT 212 :BUS:BITS 213 :BUS:CLEar 215 :BUS:DISPlay 216 :BUS:LABel 217 :BUS:MASK 218 :CALibrate Commands 219 :CALibrate:DATE 221 :CALibrate:LABel 222 :CALibrate:OUTPut 223 :CALibrate:STARt 224 :CALibrate:STATus 225 :CALibrate:SWITch 226 :CALibrate:TEMPerature 2
:CHANnel:SCALe 246 :CHANnel:UNITs 247 :CHANnel:VERNier 248 :DIGital Commands 249 :DIGital:DISPlay 251 :DIGital:LABel 252 :DIGital:POSition 253 :DIGital:SIZE 254 :DIGital:THReshold 255 :DISPlay Commands 256 :DISPlay:CLEar 258 :DISPlay:DATA 259 :DISPlay:LABel 261 :DISPlay:LABList 262 :DISPlay:PERSistence 263 :DISPlay:SOURce 264 :DISPlay:VECTors 265 :EXTernal Trigger Commands 266 :EXTernal:BWLimit 268 :EXTernal:IMPedance 269 :EXTernal:PROBe 270 :EXTernal:PROBe:ID 271 :EXTernal:PROBe:
:FUNCtion:WINDow 292 :HARDcopy Commands 293 :HARDcopy:AREA 295 :HARDcopy:APRinter 296 :HARDcopy:FACTors 297 :HARDcopy:FFEed 298 :HARDcopy:INKSaver 299 :HARDcopy:LAYout 300 :HARDcopy:PALette 301 :HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST 302 :HARDcopy:STARt 303 :LISTer Commands 304 :LISTer:DATA 305 :LISTer:DISPlay 306 :MARKer Commands 307 :MARKer:MODE 309 :MARKer:X1Position 310 :MARKer:X1Y1source 311 :MARKer:X2Position 312 :MARKer:X2Y2source 313 :MARKer:XDELta 314 :MARKer:Y1Position 315 :MARKer:Y2Position 316 :MARKer:YDELta 3
:MEASure:SDEViation 347 :MEASure:SHOW 348 :MEASure:SOURce 349 :MEASure:STATistics 351 :MEASure:STATistics:INCRement 352 :MEASure:STATistics:RESet 353 :MEASure:TEDGe 354 :MEASure:TVALue 356 :MEASure:VAMPlitude 358 :MEASure:VAVerage 359 :MEASure:VBASe 360 :MEASure:VMAX 361 :MEASure:VMIN 362 :MEASure:VPP 363 :MEASure:VRATio 364 :MEASure:VRMS 365 :MEASure:VTIMe 366 :MEASure:VTOP 367 :MEASure:XMAX 368 :MEASure:XMIN 369 :MTESt Commands 370 :MTESt:AMASk:CREate 375 :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce 376 :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs 377 :MT
:MTESt:RMODe:TIME 395 :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms 396 :MTESt:SCALe:BIND 397 :MTESt:SCALe:X1 398 :MTESt:SCALe:XDELta 399 :MTESt:SCALe:Y1 400 :MTESt:SCALe:Y2 401 :MTESt:SOURce 402 :MTESt:TITLe 403 :POD Commands 404 :POD:DISPlay 405 :POD:SIZE 406 :POD:THReshold 407 :RECall Commands 409 :RECall:FILename 410 :RECall:IMAGe[:STARt] 411 :RECall:MASK[:STARt] 412 :RECall:PWD 413 :RECall:SETup[:STARt] 414 :SAVE Commands 415 :SAVE:FILename 417 :SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt] 418 :SAVE:IMAGe:AREA 419 :SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors 420 :SA
:SBUS:CAN:COUNt:UTILization 438 :SBUS:DISPlay 439 :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:NULL 440 :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:RESet 441 :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:SYNC 442 :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:TOTal 443 :SBUS:I2S:BASE 444 :SBUS:IIC:ASIZe 445 :SBUS:LIN:PARity 446 :SBUS:M1553:BASE 447 :SBUS:MODE 448 :SBUS:SPI:BITorder 449 :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh 450 :SBUS:UART:BASE 451 :SBUS:UART:COUNt:ERRor 452 :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RESet 453 :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RXFRames 454 :SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFRames 455 :SBUS:UART:FRAMing 456 :SYSTem Commands 457 :SYSTem:DATE 458 :SYSTem:DS
General :TRIGger Commands 482 :TRIGger:HFReject 483 :TRIGger:HOLDoff 484 :TRIGger:MODE 485 :TRIGger:NREJect 486 :TRIGger:PATTern 487 :TRIGger:SWEep 489 :TRIGger:CAN Commands 490 :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA 492 :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth 493 :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID 494 :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID:MODE 495 :TRIGger:CAN:SAMPlepoint 496 :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate 497 :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce 498 :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger 499 :TRIGger:DURation Commands 501 :TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan 502 :TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan 503
:TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce 527 :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger 528 :TRIGger:GLITch Commands 529 :TRIGger:GLITch:GREaterthan 531 :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan 532 :TRIGger:GLITch:LEVel 533 :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity 534 :TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier 535 :TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe 536 :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce 537 :TRIGger:I2S Commands 538 :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnment 540 :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio 541 :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe 542 :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA 543 :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat 545 :TRIGger:I2S:RANGe 546 :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth 548 :TRIGger:I2S:
:TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger 577 :TRIGger:M1553 Commands 578 :TRIGger:M1553:AUTosetup 579 :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA 580 :TRIGger:M1553:RTA 581 :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer 582 :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer 583 :TRIGger:M1553:TYPE 584 :TRIGger:SEQuence Commands 585 :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt 586 :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDGE 587 :TRIGger:SEQuence:FIND 588 :TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern 589 :TRIGger:SEQuence:RESet 590 :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer 591 :TRIGger:SEQuence:TRIGger 592 :TRIGger:SPI Commands 593 :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe 594 :TR
:TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX 620 :TRIGger:UART:TYPE 621 :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh 622 :TRIGger:USB Commands 623 :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus 624 :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus 625 :TRIGger:USB:SPEed 626 :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger 627 :WAVeform Commands 628 :WAVeform:BYTeorder 636 :WAVeform:COUNt 637 :WAVeform:DATA 638 :WAVeform:FORMat 640 :WAVeform:POINts 641 :WAVeform:POINts:MODE 643 :WAVeform:PREamble 645 :WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt 648 :WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG 649 :WAVeform:SOURce 650 :WAVeform:SOURce:SUBSource 654 :WAVeform:TYPE
:ERASe 713 :EXTernal:INPut 714 :EXTernal:PMODe 715 :FUNCtion:SOURce 716 :FUNCtion:VIEW 717 :HARDcopy:DESTination 718 :HARDcopy:DEVice 719 :HARDcopy:FILename 720 :HARDcopy:FORMat 721 :HARDcopy:GRAYscale 722 :HARDcopy:IGColors 723 :HARDcopy:PDRiver 724 :MEASure:LOWer 725 :MEASure:SCRatch 726 :MEASure:TDELta 727 :MEASure:THResholds 728 :MEASure:TMAX 729 :MEASure:TMIN 730 :MEASure:TSTArt 731 :MEASure:TSTOp 732 :MEASure:TVOLt 733 :MEASure:UPPer 735 :MEASure:VDELta 736 :MEASure:VSTArt 737 :MEASure:VSTOp 738 :MTES
8 Error Messages 9 Status Reporting Status Reporting Data Structures Status Byte Register (STB) 766 769 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) Trigger Event Register (TER) Output Queue 771 772 773 Message Queue 774 (Standard) Event Status Register (ESR) 775 (Standard) Event Status Enable Register (ESE) Error Queue 776 777 Operation Status Event Register (:OPERegister[:EVENt]) 778 Operation Status Condition Register (:OPERegister:CONDition) Arm Event Register (AER) 779 780 Overload Event Re
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Command Classifications 798 Core Commands 798 Non-Core Commands 798 Obsolete Commands 798 Valid Command/Query Strings 799 Program Message Syntax 799 Command Tree 803 Duplicate Mnemonics 817 Tree Traversal Rules and Multiple Commands Query Return Values 818 820 All Oscilloscope Commands Are Sequential 821 12 Programming Examples VISA COM Examples 824 VISA COM Example in Visual Basic 824 VISA COM Example in C# 834 VISA COM Example in Visual Basic .
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 1 What's New What's New in Version 6.00 22 What's New in Version 5.25 25 What's New in Version 5.20 27 What's New in Version 5.15 30 What's New in Version 5.10 32 What's New in Version 5.00 33 What's New in Version 4.10 35 What's New in Version 4.00 37 What's New in Version 3.50 39 What's New in Version 3.
1 What's New What's New in Version 6.00 New features in version 6.00 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The ability to perform measurements and math functions on a 10K- point (maximum) precision analysis data record. • Support for the new N5469A MIL- STD 1553 triggering and decode option (Option 553). • Support for the new N5432C FlexRay triggering and decode option (Option FLX) which replaces previous FlexRay triggering and serial decode options.
What's New Discontinued Commands Command Differences :TRIGger:FLEXray:EVENt:TYPE (see page 522) The BSS (Byte Start Sequence) has been added and the FSS (Frame Start Sequence) has been removed. :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger (see page 528) The TIME trigger type is no longer supported. :TRIGger:MODE (see page 485) You can now select the M1553 trigger mode.
1 24 What's New Discontinued Command Current Command Equivalent Comments :SBUS:BUSDoctor:MODE none The VPT1000 (BusDoctor) vehicle protocol tester module is not used with the new FLX option. :TRIGger:FLEXray:TIME:CBAS e none Time triggering not supported by new FLX option. :TRIGger:FLEXray:TIME:CREPe tition none Time triggering not supported by new FLX option. :TRIGger:FLEXray:TIME:SEGM ent none Time triggering not supported by new FLX option.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.25 New features in version 5.25 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The Lister display for showing decoded serial data in tabular format. • The ability to trigger on and decode I2S serial bus data with a four- channel oscilloscope that includes the Option SND license. • FlexRay event triggering. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
1 What's New Changed Commands 26 Command Differences :SBUS:MODE (see page 448) You can now select the I2S serial bus decode mode. :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger (see page 528) You can now select FlexRay EVENt triggers. :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger (see page 577) You can now select the DATA option for triggering on a LIN frame ID and data. :TRIGger:MODE (see page 485) You can now select the I2S trigger mode. :TRIGger:TV:STANdard (see page 607) The P1080L50HZ and P1080L60HZ standards have been added.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.20 New features in version 5.20 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • Mask testing, enabled with Option LMT. • Tracking cursors (markers) have been added. • Measurement statistics have been added. • Labels can now be up to 10 characters. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
1 What's New Changed Commands Obsolete Commands 28 Command Differences :BUS:LABel (see page 217) Labels can now be up to 10 characters. :CHANnel:LABel (see page 237) Labels can now be up to 10 characters. :DIGital:LABel (see page 252) Labels can now be up to 10 characters. :DISPlay:LABList (see page 262) Labels can now be up to 10 characters. :MARKer:MODE (see page 309) You can now select the WAVeform tracking cursors mode.
What's New Obsolete Command Current Command Equivalent :MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure (see page 744) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STO P (see page 393) :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} (see page 745) :RUN (see page 186) or :STOP (see page 190) :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce (see page 746) :TRIGger Commands (see page 479) Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 1 Behavior Differences There are various commands for setting the source with different types of triggers.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.15 New features in version 5.15 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • Waveform math can be performed using channels 3 and 4, and there is a new ADD operator. • Ratio of AC RMS values measurement. • Analog channel impedance protection lock. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
What's New Changed Commands Obsolete Commands Command Differences :ACQuire:COUNt (see page 197) The :ACQuire:COUNt 1 command has been deprecated. The AVERage acquisition type with a count of 1 is functionally equivalent to the HRESolution acquisition type; however, you should select the high-resolution acquisition mode with the :ACQuire:TYPE HRESolution command instead.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.10 New features in version 5.10 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • Segmented memory acquisition mode, enabled with Option SGM. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below. New Commands Changed Commands 32 Command Description :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt (see page 203) Sets the number of memory segments. :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex (see page 204) Selects the segmented memory index.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.00 New features in version 5.00 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The ability to trigger on and decode UART/RS- 232 serial bus data with a four- channel oscilloscope that includes the Option 232 license. • The :SAVE and :RECall command subsystems. • Changes to the :HARDcopy command subsystem to make a clearer distinction between printing and save/recall functionality. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
1 What's New Changed Commands Obsolete Commands 34 Command Differences :SBUS:MODE (see page 448) You can now select the UART serial bus decode mode. :TRIGger:MODE (see page 485) You can now select the UART trigger mode.
1 What's New What's New in Version 4.10 New features in version 4.10 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The ability to trigger on and decode FlexRay serial bus data using a Decomsys BusDoctor 2 protocol analyzer with a four- channel mixed- signal oscilloscope that includes the Option FRS license. • The square root waveform math function. • Several new hardcopy printer drivers. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
1 What's New Changed Commands 36 Command Description :TRIGger:FLEXray:TIME:CREPetition Sets/queries the repetition number of the FlexRay cycle to trigger on. :TRIGger:FLEXray:TIME:SEGMent Sets/queries the FlexRay segment type. :TRIGger:FLEXray:TIME:SLOT Sets/queries the FlexRay slot type and ID. :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger (see page 528) Sets/queries the FlexRay trigger mode.
1 What's New What's New in Version 4.00 New features in version 4.00 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The ability to :AUToscale selected channels only and specify the acquisition type and mode that is set after an :AUToscale. • The :BUS command subsystem for controlling up to two buses made up of digital channels.
1 What's New Changed Commands 38 Command Differences :AUToscale (see page 156) You can now specify which channels to autoscale. :BLANk (see page 160) Now, you can also use this command with digital channel buses. :DIGitize (see page 162) Now, you can also use this command with digital channel buses. :STATus (see page 189) Now, you can also use this command with digital channel buses. :VIEW (see page 192) Now, you can also use this command with digital channel buses.
1 What's New What's New in Version 3.50 New features in version 3.50 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The CAN and LIN options have been added to the :SBUS:MODE (serial decode mode) command. • The :SBUS:CAN:COUNt commands have been added to count CAN bus frames, count load utilization, and reset the counters. • The ALLerrors, OVERload, and ACKerror options have been added to the :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger command.
1 What's New Changed Commands Obsolete Commands 40 Command Description :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint (see page 572) Sets the point during the bit time where the bit level is sampled to determine whether the bit is dominant or recessive. The sample point represents the percentage of time between the beginning of the bit time to the end of the bit time. :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard (see page 575) Sets the LIN standard in effect for triggering and decoding to be LIN1.3 or LIN2.0.
1 What's New What's New in Version 3.00 New features in version 3.00 of the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The :SBUS command subsystem for controlling serial decode bus display, mode, and other options. • The EBURst trigger mode and supporting :TRIGger:EBURst commands. • The :ACQuire:AALias and :ACQuire:DAALias commands. • The :WAVeform:POINts:MODE command. • The :MEASure:SDEViation command. • The :TIMebase:REFClock command. • Changes to the :TRIGger:IIC commands.
1 What's New Changed Commands 42 Command Description :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt (see page 508) Sets the Nth edge of burst edge counter resource. :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE (see page 509) Sets the Nth edge in a burst idle resource. :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe (see page 508) Specifies whether the rising edge (POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative) of the Nth edge in a burst will generate a trigger. :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2 (see page 559) Sets IIC data 2.
1 What's New Command Differences From 54620/54640 Series Oscilloscopes The main differences between the version 1.00 programming command set for the InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscopes and the 54620/54640 Series oscilloscopes are related to: • :HARDcopy and :DISPlay command subsystem changes for USB printers and the high resolution color display. • New standards supported by the :TRIGger:TV commands. • Support for 113xA Series probes.
1 What's New Changed Commands 44 Command Description :HARDcopy:PALette (see page 301) Sets the hardcopy palette color. Replaces the 5462x/4x :HARDcopy:GRAYscale (see page 722) command. :OPERegister:CONDition? (see page 177) Returns the integer value contained in the Table 52 (a new register in addition to the Table 53 whose value is returned by the :OPERegister[:EVENt]? (see page 179) query). :POD:SIZE (see page 406) Specifies the size of digital channels on the display.
What's New Command Differences From 5462x/4x Oscilloscopes :OVLRegister (see page 183) The Overload Event Register is now a 16-bit register (instead of 8-bit) and it contains bits that identify when faults occur on the oscilloscope channels (in addition to the bits that identify when overloads occur). :PRINt (see page 185) The options are now: COLor (instead of HIRes), GRAYscale (instead of LORes), PRINter0 (instead of PARallel), BMP8bit (instead of TIFF). (The PCL option is now invalid.
1 What's New Obsolete Commands Discontinued Commands 46 Obsolete Command Current Command Equivalent :HARDcopy:DESTination (see page 718) :HARDcopy:FILename (see page 720) :HARDcopy:GRAYscale (see page 722) :HARDcopy:PALette (see page 301) :PRINt? (see page 747) :DISPlay:DATA? (see page 259) Behavior Differences The options are now: COLor (instead of HIRes), GRAYscale (instead of LORes), PRINter0 (instead of PARallel), BMP8bit (instead of TIFF). (The DISK and PCL options are now invalid.
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 2 Setting Up Step 1. Install Agilent IO Libraries Suite software 48 Step 2. Connect and set up the oscilloscope 49 Step 3. Verify the oscilloscope connection 51 This chapter explains how to install the Agilent IO Libraries Suite software, connect the oscilloscope to the controller PC, set up the oscilloscope, and verify the oscilloscope connection.
2 Setting Up Step 1. Install Agilent IO Libraries Suite software Insert the Automation- Ready CD that was shipped with your oscilloscope into the controller PC's CD- ROM drive, and follow its installation instructions. You can also download the Agilent IO Libraries Suite software from the web at: • "http://www.agilent.
2 Setting Up Step 2. Connect and set up the oscilloscope The 6000 Series oscilloscope has three different interfaces you can use for programming: USB (device), LAN, or GPIB. All three interfaces are "live" by default, but you can turn them off if desired. To access these settings press the Utility key on the front panel, then press the I/O softkey, then press the Control softkey.
2 Setting Up 4 On the oscilloscope, verify that the controller interface is enabled: a Press the Utility button. b Using the softkeys, press I/O and Control. c Ensure the box next to LAN is selected ( ). If not ( ), use the Entry knob to select LAN; then, press the Control softkey again. 5 Configure the oscilloscope's LAN interface: a Press the Configure softkey until "LAN" is selected. b Press the LAN Settings softkey. c Press the Addresses softkey.
Setting Up 2 Step 3. Verify the oscilloscope connection 1 On the controller PC, click on the Agilent IO Control icon in the taskbar and choose Agilent Connection Expert from the popup menu. 2 In the Agilent Connection Expert application, instruments connected to the controller's USB and GPIB interfaces should automatically appear. (You can click Refresh All to update the list of instruments on these interfaces.
2 Setting Up You must manually add instruments on LAN interfaces: a Right- click on the LAN interface, choose Add Instrument from the popup menu b If the oscilloscope is on the same subnet, select it, and click OK.
Setting Up 2 Otherwise, if the instrument is not on the same subnet, click Add Address. i In the next dialog, select either Hostname or IP address, and enter the oscilloscope's hostname or IP address. ii Click Test Connection.
2 Setting Up iii If the instrument is successfully opened, click OK to close the dialog. If the instrument is not opened successfully, go back and verify the LAN connections and the oscilloscope setup.
2 Setting Up 3 Test some commands on the instrument: a Right- click on the instrument and choose Send Commands To This Instrument from the popup menu. b In the Agilent Interactive IO application, enter commands in the Command field and press Send Command, Read Response, or Send&Read. c Choose Connect>Exit from the menu to exit the Agilent Interactive IO application. 4 In the Agilent Connection Expert application, choose File>Exit from the menu to exit the application.
2 56 Setting Up Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 3 Getting Started Basic Oscilloscope Program Structure 58 Programming the Oscilloscope 60 Other Ways of Sending Commands 69 This chapter gives you an overview of programming the 6000 Series oscilloscopes. It describes basic oscilloscope program structure and shows how to program the oscilloscope using a few simple examples.
3 Getting Started Basic Oscilloscope Program Structure The following figure shows the basic structure of every program you will write for the oscilloscope. Initializing To ensure consistent, repeatable performance, you need to start the program, controller, and oscilloscope in a known state. Without correct initialization, your program may run correctly in one instance and not in another.
Getting Started 3 To collect data, you use the :DIGitize command. This command clears the waveform buffers and starts the acquisition process. Acquisition continues until acquisition memory is full, then stops. The acquired data is displayed by the oscilloscope, and the captured data can be measured, stored in trace memory in the oscilloscope, or transferred to the controller for further analysis. Any additional commands sent while :DIGitize is working are buffered until :DIGitize is complete.
3 Getting Started Programming the Oscilloscope • "Referencing the IO Library" on page 60 • "Opening the Oscilloscope Connection via the IO Library" on page 61 • "Using :AUToscale to Automate Oscilloscope Setup" on page 62 • "Using Other Oscilloscope Setup Commands" on page 62 • "Capturing Data with the :DIGitize Command" on page 63 • "Reading Query Responses from the Oscilloscope" on page 65 • "Reading Query Results into String Variables" on page 66 • "Reading Query Results into Numeric Variables" on page
3 Getting Started 3 Click OK. To reference the Agilent VISA COM library in Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0: 1 Choose Project>References... from the main menu. 2 In the References dialog, check the "VISA COM 3.0 Type Library". 3 Click OK. Opening the Oscilloscope Connection via the IO Library PC controllers communicate with the oscilloscope by sending and receiving messages over a remote interface.
3 Getting Started Dim myMgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager Dim myScope As VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 ' Open the connection to the oscilloscope. Get the VISA Address from the ' Agilent Connection Expert (installed with Agilent IO Libraries Suite). Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("") ' Clear the interface buffer. myScope.IO.Clear When you are using GPIB, CLEAR also resets the oscilloscope's parser.
Getting Started 3 Vertical is set to 16 V full- scale (2 V/div) with center of screen at 1 V and probe attenuation set to 10. This example sets the time base at 1 ms full- scale (100 ms/div) with a delay of 100 µs. Example Oscilloscope Setup Code This program demonstrates the basic command structure used to program the oscilloscope. ' Initialize the instrument interface to a known state. myScope.IO.Clear ' Initialize the instrument to a preset state. myScope.
3 Getting Started NOTE Ensure New Data is Collected When you change the oscilloscope configuration, the waveform buffers are cleared. Before doing a measurement, send the :DIGitize command to the oscilloscope to ensure new data has been collected. When you send the :DIGitize command to the oscilloscope, the specified channel signal is digitized with the current :ACQuire parameters.
3 Getting Started The easiest method of transferring a digitized waveform depends on data structures, formatting available and I/O capabilities. You must scale the integers to determine the voltage value of each point. These integers are passed starting with the left most point on the instrument's display. For more information, see the waveform subsystem commands and corresponding program code examples in ":WAVeform Commands" on page 628.
3 Getting Started Reading Query Results into String Variables The output of the instrument may be numeric or character data depending on what is queried. Refer to the specific command descriptions in Chapter 5, “Commands by Subsystem,” starting on page 123 for the formats and types of data returned from queries. NOTE Express String Variables Using Exact Syntax In Visual Basic, string variables are case sensitive and must be expressed exactly the same each time they are used.
3 Getting Started /TLADQ NE %HFHSR 5G@S 'NKKNV "BST@K %@S@ AXSDR NE C@S@ SDQLHM@SNQ /TLADQ NE #XSDR SN AD 5Q@MRLHSSDC Figure 2 Definite-length block response data The "8" states the number of digits that follow, and "00001000" states the number of bytes to be transmitted.
3 Getting Started strResults() = myScope.ReadList(ASCIIType_BSTR) MsgBox "Timebase range: " + strResults(0) + ", delay: " + strResults(1) To read the :TIMebase:RANGe?;DELay? query result into multiple numeric variables, you could use the ReadList method to read the query results into a variant array variable using the commands: myScope.WriteString ":TIMebase:RANGe?;DELay?" Dim varResults() As Variant varResults() = myScope.
Getting Started 3 Other Ways of Sending Commands Standard Commands for Programmable Instrumentation (SCPI) can be sent via a Telnet socket or through the Browser Web Control. Telnet Sockets The following information is provided for programmers who wish to control the oscilloscope with SCPI commands in a Telnet session. To connect to the oscilloscope via a telnet socket, issue the following command: telnet 5024 where is the hostname of the oscilloscope.
3 70 Getting Started Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 4 Commands Quick Reference Command Summary 72 Syntax Elements 120 71
4 Commands Quick Reference Command Summary Table 2 Common (*) Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns *CLS (see page 129) n/a n/a *ESE (see page 130) *ESE? (see page 131) ::= 0 to 255; an integer in NR1 format: Bit Weight Name Enables --- ------ ---- ---------7 128 PON Power On 6 64 URQ User Request 5 32 CME Command Error 4 16 EXE Execution Error 3 8 DDE Dev.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 2 Common (*) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a *OPT? (see page 137) ::= 0,0, ::= , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 2 Common (*) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns *RCL (see page 139) n/a ::= {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} *RST (see page 140) n/a See *RST (Reset) (see page 140) *SAV (see page 143) n/a ::= {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} *SRE (see page 144) *SRE? (see page 145) ::= sum of all bits that are set, 0 to 255; an integer in NR1 format.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 3 Root (:) Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :ACTivity (see page 154) :ACTivity? (see page 154) ::= , ::= presence of edges (32-bit integer in NR1 format) ::= logical highs or lows (32-bit integer in NR1 format) n/a :AER? (see page 155) {0 | 1}; an integer in NR1 format :AUToscale [[,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 3 Root (:) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :HWEenable (see page 164) :HWEenable? (see page 164) ::= 16-bit integer in NR1 format n/a :HWERregister:CONDiti on? (see page 166) ::= 16-bit integer in NR1 format n/a :HWERegister[:EVENt]? (see page 168) ::= 16-bit integer in NR1 format :MERGe (see page 170) n/a ::= {PMEMory{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9}} :MTEenable (s
Commands Quick Reference Table 3 Root (:) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :RUN (see page 186) n/a n/a n/a :SERial (see page 187) ::= unquoted string containing serial number :SINGle (see page 188) n/a n/a n/a :STATus? (see page 189) {0 | 1} ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 4 :ACQuire Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :ACQuire:POINts? (see page 200) <# points> ::= an integer in NR1 format :ACQuire:RSIGnal (see page 201) :ACQuire:RSIGnal? (see page 201) ::= {OFF | OUT | IN} :ACQuire:SEGMented:AN ALyze (see page 202) n/a n/a (with Option SGM) :ACQuire:SEGMented:CO UNt (see page 203) :ACQuire:SEGMented:CO UNt? (see page 203) ::= an integer
Commands Quick Reference Table 5 :BUS Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :BUS:LABel (see page 217) :BUS:LABel? (see page 217) ::= quoted ASCII string up to 10 characters ::= 1 or 2; an integer in NR1 format :BUS:MASK (see page 218) :BUS:MASK? (see page 218) ::= 32-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 6 :CALibrate Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :CALibrate:TEMPeratur e? (see page 227) ::= degrees C delta since last cal in NR3 format n/a :CALibrate:TIME? (see page 228) ::= ,,; all in NR1 format Table 7 :CHANnel Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :CHANnel:BWLimit {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 232) :CHANnel:BWLimit? (see page 23
Commands Quick Reference Table 7 :CHANnel Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :CHANnel:PROBe:ID? (see page 241) ::= unquoted ASCII string up to 11 characters ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :CHANnel:PROBe:SKE W (see page 242) :CHANnel:PROBe:SKE W? (see page 242) ::= -100 ns to +100 ns in NR3 format ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :CHANnel:PROBe:STY Pe (see page 243) :CHANnel:PROBe:STY Pe?
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 8 :DIGital Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :DIGital:POSition (see page 253) :DIGital:POSition? (see page 253) ::= 0-15; an integer in NR1 format ::= 0-7 if display size = large, 0-15 if size = medium, 0-31 if size = small :DIGital:SIZE (see page 254) :DIGital:SIZE? (see page 254) ::= {SMALl | MEDium | LARGe} :DIGital:THReshold [suffix] (see page 255) :DIGital
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 9 :DISPlay Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :DISPlay:PERSistence (see page 263) :DISPlay:PERSistence? (see page 263) ::= {MINimum | INFinite}} :DISPlay:SOURce (see page 264) :DISPlay:SOURce? (see page 264) ::= {PMEMory{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9}} :DISPlay:VECTors {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} (see page 265) :DISPlay:VECTors? (see page 265) {1 | 0} Table 10 :EXTernal Trigger Commands Summ
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 11 :FUNCtion Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :FUNCtion:CENTer (see page 279) :FUNCtion:CENTer? (see page 279) ::= the current center frequency in NR3 format. The range of legal values is from 0 Hz to 25 GHz.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 11 :FUNCtion Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :FUNCtion:REFerence (see page 287) :FUNCtion:REFerence? (see page 287) ::= the value at center screen in NR3 format. The range of legal values is +/-10 times the current sensitivity of the selected function.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 12 :HARDcopy Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :HARDcopy:FACTors {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 297) :HARDcopy:FACTors? (see page 297) {0 | 1} :HARDcopy:FFEed {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 298) :HARDcopy:FFEed? (see page 298) {0 | 1} :HARDcopy:INKSaver {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 299) :HARDcopy:INKSaver? (see page 299) {0 | 1} :HARDcopy:LAYout (see page 300) :HARDcopy:LAYout? (see page 300) ::= {L
Commands Quick Reference 4 Table 14 :MARKer Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :MARKer:MODE (see page 309) :MARKer:MODE? (see page 309) ::= {OFF | MEASurement | MANual | WAVeform} :MARKer:X1Position [suffix] (see page 310) :MARKer:X1Position? (see page 310) ::= X1 cursor position value in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps | Hz | kHz | MHz} ::= X1 cursor position value in NR3 format :MARKer:X1Y1source (se
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 15 :MEASure Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:CLEar (see page 326) n/a n/a :MEASure:COUNter [] (see page 327) :MEASure:COUNter? [] (see page 327) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 15 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:FALLtime [] (see page 334) :MEASure:FALLtime? [] (see page 334) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 15 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:PHASe [] [,] (see page 340) :MEASure:PHASe? [] [,] (see page 340) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= the phase angle value in degrees in NR3 format :MEASure:PREShoot [] (see page 341) :MEASure:PREShoot? [] (see page 341) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 15 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:SOURce [,] (see page 349) :MEASure:SOURce? (see page 349) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 15 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :MEASure:TVALue? , [] [,] (see page 356) ::= voltage level that the waveform must cross. ::= direction of the waveform when is crossed. ::= transitions reported.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 15 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:VPP [] (see page 363) :MEASure:VPP? [] (see page 363) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= voltage peak-to-peak of the selected waveform in NR3 format :MEASure:VRATio [] [,] (see page 340) :MEASure:VRATio? [] [,] (see page 364) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion |
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 16 :MTESt Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:AMASk:CREate (see page 375) n/a n/a :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce (see page 376) :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce? (see page 376) ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs (see page 377) :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs? (see page 377) ::= {CURRent | DIVisions} :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta (see page 378) :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta? (see
Commands Quick Reference 4 Table 16 :MTESt Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: MEASure {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 390) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: MEASure? (see page 390) {0 | 1} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: PRINt {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 391) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: PRINt? (see page 391) {0 | 1} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: SAVE {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 392) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: SAVE? (see page 392) {0 | 1} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: STOP {{0
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 16 :MTESt Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:SOURce (see page 402) :MTESt:SOURce? (see page 402) ::= {CHANnel | NONE} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models n/a :MTESt:TITLe? (see page 403) ::= a string of up to 128 ASCII characters Table 17 :POD Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :POD:DISPlay {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 405) :P
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 18 :RECall Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :RECall:PWD (see page 413) :RECall:PWD? (see page 413) ::= quoted ASCII string :RECall:SETup[:STARt] [] (see page 414) n/a ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string Table 19 :SAVE Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :SAVE:FILename
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 19 :SAVE Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :SAVE:MASK[:STARt] [] (see page 425) n/a ::= { | } ::= 0-3; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string :SAVE:PWD (see page 426) :SAVE:PWD? (see page 426) ::= quoted ASCII string :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] [] (see page 427) n/a ::= { | }
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 20 :SBUS Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:UTILi zation? (see page 438) ::= floating-point in NR3 format :SBUS:DISPlay {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 439) :SBUS:DISPlay? (see page 439) {0 | 1} n/a :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:N ULL? (see page 440) ::= integer in NR1 format :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:R ESet (see page 441) n/a n/a n/a :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:S YNC? (see page 442) ::=
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 20 :SBUS Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFR ames? (see page 455) ::= integer in NR1 format :SBUS:UART:FRAMing (see page 456) :SBUS:UART:FRAMing? (see page 456) ::= {OFF | | } ::= 8-bit integer from 0-255 (0x00-0xff) ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 21 :SYSTem Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :SYSTem:SETup (see page 464) :SYSTem:SETup? (see page 464) ::= data in IEEE 488.2 # format.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 23 General :TRIGger Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:HFReject {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 483) :TRIGger:HFReject? (see page 483) {0 | 1} :TRIGger:HOLDoff (see page 484) :TRIGger:HOLDoff? (see page 484) ::= 60 ns to 10 s in NR3 format :TRIGger:MODE (see page 485) :TRIGger:MODE? (see page 485) ::= {EDGE | GLITch | PATTern | CAN | DURation | I2S |IIC | EBURst | LIN | M1553| SEQuence |
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 24 :TRIGger:CAN Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern: DATA , (see page 492) :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern: DATA? (see page 492) ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or (with Option AMS) ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn...
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 24 :TRIGger:CAN Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce (see page 498) :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce? (see page 498) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 26 :TRIGger:EBURst Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt (see page 508) :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt ? (see page 508) ::= integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE (see page 509) :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE? (see page 509) ::= time in seconds in NR3 format :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe (see page 510) :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe ? (see page 510) ::= {NEGative | POSitive} Table 27 :TRIGger[:E
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 28 :TRIGger:FLEXray Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTo setup (see page 518) n/a n/a :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUD rate (see page 519) :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUD rate? (see page 519) ::= {2500000 | 5000000 | 10000000} :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHAN nel (see page 520) :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHAN nel? (see page 520) ::= {A | B} :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRo r:TYPE (see page 521) :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRo
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 29 :TRIGger:GLITch Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:GLITch:GREat erthan [s uffix] (see page 531) :TRIGger:GLITch:GREat erthan? (see page 531) ::= floating-point number in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSt han [suff ix] (see page 532) :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSt han? (see page 532) ::= floating-point number in NR3 format [suffix] ::=
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 30 :TRIGger:I2S Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnmen t (see page 540) :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnmen t? (see page 540) ::= {I2S | LJ | RJ} :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio (see page 541) :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio? (see page 541) ::= {RIGHt | LEFT | EITHer} :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SL OPe (see page 542) :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SL OPe? (see page 542) ::= {NEGative | POSitive} :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern: DATA
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 30 :TRIGger:I2S Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:C LOCk (see page 549) :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:C LOCk? (see page 549) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 31 :TRIGger:IIC Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce] :CLOCk (see page 560) :TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce] :CLOCk? (see page 560) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 32 :TRIGger:LIN Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern: DATA:LENGth (see page 570) :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern: DATA:LENGth? (see page 570) ::= integer from 1 to 8 in NR1 format :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern: FORMat (see page 571) :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern: FORMat? (see page 571) ::= {BINary | HEX | DECimal} :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepo int (see page 572) :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepo int? (see page 572)
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 33 :TRIGger:M1553 Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:M1553:RTA (see page 581) :TRIGger:M1553:RTA? (see page 581) ::= 5-bit integer in decimal, , or from 0-31 ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9|A,..,F} ::= "0xnn" where n::= {0,..,9|A,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 34 :TRIGger:SEQuence Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:SEQuence:RES et (see page 590) :TRIGger:SEQuence:RES et? (see page 590) ::= {NONE | PATTern1,ENTered | PATTern1,EXITed | EDGE1 | PATTern1,AND,EDGE1 | PATTern2,ENTered | PATTern2,EXITed | EDGE2 | TIMer} Values used in find and trigger stages not available. EDGE2 not available if EDGE2,COUNt used in trigger stage.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 35 :TRIGger:SPI Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:C LOCk (see page 599) :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:C LOCk? (see page 599) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 37 :TRIGger:UART Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:UART:BASE (see page 610) :TRIGger:UART:BASE? (see page 610) ::= {ASCii | HEX} :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrat e (see page 611) :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrat e? (see page 611) ::= integer from 1200 to 3000000 in 100 b/s increments :TRIGger:UART:BITorde r (see page 612) :TRIGger:UART:BITorde r? (see page 612) ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} :TRIGge
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 37 :TRIGger:UART Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:UART:SOURce: TX (see page 620) :TRIGger:UART:SOURce: TX? (see page 620) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 39 :WAVeform Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :WAVeform:BYTeorder (see page 636) :WAVeform:BYTeorder? (see page 636) ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} n/a :WAVeform:COUNt? (see page 637) ::= an integer from 1 to 65536 in NR1 format n/a :WAVeform:DATA? (see page 638) , For example, to transmit 1000 bytes of data, the syntax would be: #800001000<1000 bytes of data> 8 is the number
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 39 :WAVeform Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :WAVeform:PREamble? (see page 645) ::= , ,,, , , ,, , ::= an integer in NR1 format: • 0 for BYTE format • 1 for WORD format • 2 for ASCii format ::= an integer in NR1 format: • • • • 0 1 2 3 for for for for NORMal
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 39 :WAVeform Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :WAVeform:XINCrement? (see page 658) ::= x-increment in the current preamble in NR3 format n/a :WAVeform:XORigin? (see page 659) ::= x-origin value in the current preamble in NR3 format n/a :WAVeform:XREFerence? (see page 660) ::= 0 (x-reference value in the current preamble in NR1 format) n/a :WAVeform:YINCrement? (see page 661)
4 Commands Quick Reference Syntax Elements • "Number Format" on page 120 • " (Line Terminator)" on page 120 • "[ ] (Optional Syntax Terms)" on page 120 • "{ } (Braces)" on page 120 • "::= (Defined As)" on page 120 • "< > (Angle Brackets)" on page 121 • "... (Ellipsis)" on page 121 • "n,..,p (Value Ranges)" on page 121 • "d (Digits)" on page 121 • "Quoted ASCII String" on page 121 • "Definite- Length Block Response Data" on page 121 Number Format NR1 specifies integer data.
4 Commands Quick Reference For example, ::= indicates that can be replaced by in any statement containing . < > (Angle Brackets) < > Angle brackets enclose words or characters that symbolize a program code parameter or an interface command. ... (Ellipsis) ... An ellipsis (trailing dots) indicates that the preceding element may be repeated one or more times. n,..,p (Value Ranges) n,..,p ::= all integers between n and p inclusive.
4 Commands Quick Reference #800001000<1000 bytes of data> 8 is the number of digits that follow 00001000 is the number of bytes to be transmitted <1000 bytes of data> is the actual data 122 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 5 Commands by Subsystem Subsystem Description "Common (*) Commands" on page 125 Commands defined by IEEE 488.2 standard that are common to all instruments. "Root (:) Commands" on page 151 Control many of the basic functions of the oscilloscope and reside at the root level of the command tree. ":ACQuire Commands" on page 193 Set the parameters for acquiring and storing data.
5 Commands by Subsystem Command Types Subsystem Description ":MEASure Commands" on page 318 Select automatic measurements to be made and control time markers. ":MTESt Commands" on page 370 Control the mask test features provided with Option LMT. ":POD Commands" on page 404 Control all oscilloscope functions associated with groups of digital channels. ":RECall Commands" on page 409 Recall previously saved oscilloscope setups and traces.
5 Commands by Subsystem Common (*) Commands Commands defined by IEEE 488.2 standard that are common to all instruments. See "Introduction to Common (*) Commands" on page 128.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 40 Common (*) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a *OPT? (see page 137) ::= 0,0, ::= , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 40 Common (*) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns *RCL (see page 139) n/a ::= {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} *RST (see page 140) n/a See *RST (Reset) (see page 140) *SAV (see page 143) n/a ::= {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} *SRE (see page 144) *SRE? (see page 145) ::= sum of all bits that are set, 0 to 255; an integer in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem Introduction to Common (*) Commands The common commands are defined by the IEEE 488.2 standard. They are implemented by all instruments that comply with the IEEE 488.2 standard. They provide some of the basic instrument functions, such as instrument identification and reset, reading the instrument setup, and determining how status is read and cleared.
Commands by Subsystem 5 *CLS (Clear Status) (see page 798) Command Syntax *CLS The *CLS common command clears the status data structures, the device- defined error queue, and the Request- for- OPC flag. NOTE See Also If the *CLS command immediately follows a program message terminator, the output queue and the MAV (message available) bit are cleared.
5 Commands by Subsystem *ESE (Standard Event Status Enable) (see page 798) Command Syntax *ESE ::= integer from 0 to 255 The *ESE common command sets the bits in the Standard Event Status Enable Register. The Standard Event Status Enable Register contains a mask value for the bits to be enabled in the Standard Event Status Register. A "1" in the Standard Event Status Enable Register enables the corresponding bit in the Standard Event Status Register.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 41 Standard Event Status Enable (ESE) (continued) Query Syntax Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Enables: 1 RQL Request Control Event when the device is requesting control. (Not used.) 0 OPC Operation Complete Event when an operation is complete. *ESE? The *ESE? query returns the current contents of the Standard Event Status Enable Register. Return Format ::= 0,..,255; an integer in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem *ESR (Standard Event Status Register) (see page 798) Query Syntax *ESR? The *ESR? query returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register. When you read the Event Status Register, the value returned is the total bit weights of all of the bits that are high at the time you read the byte. Reading the register clears the Event Status Register. The following table shows bit weight, name, and condition for each bit.
Commands by Subsystem 5 Table 42 Standard Event Status Register (ESR) (continued) Return Format Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 1 RQL Request Control The device is requesting control. (Not used.) 0 OPC Operation Complete Operation is complete. ::= 0,..,255; an integer in NR1 format. NOTE See Also Reading the Standard Event Status Register clears it. High or 1 indicates the bit is true.
5 Commands by Subsystem *IDN (Identification Number) (see page 798) Query Syntax *IDN? The *IDN? query identifies the instrument type and software version. Return Format AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES,,,X.XX.XX ::= the model number of the instrument ::= the serial number of the instrument X.XX.
5 Commands by Subsystem *LRN (Learn Device Setup) (see page 798) Query Syntax *LRN? The *LRN? query result contains the current state of the instrument. This query is similar to the :SYSTem:SETup? (see page 464) query, except that it contains ":SYST:SET " before the binary block data. The query result is a valid command that can be used to restore instrument settings at a later time.
5 Commands by Subsystem *OPC (Operation Complete) (see page 798) Command Syntax *OPC The *OPC command sets the operation complete bit in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending device operations have finished. Query Syntax *OPC? The *OPC? query places an ASCII "1" in the output queue when all pending device operations have completed. The interface hangs until this query returns.
Commands by Subsystem 5 *OPT (Option Identification) (see page 798) Query Syntax *OPT? The *OPT? query reports the options installed in the instrument. This query returns a string that identifies the module and its software revision level.
5 Commands by Subsystem The fields indicate whether the unit is a mixed-signal oscilloscope and, if so, whether it was factory installed or upgraded from an analog channels only oscilloscope (DSO).
Commands by Subsystem 5 *RCL (Recall) (see page 798) Command Syntax *RCL ::= {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} The *RCL command restores the state of the instrument from the specified save/recall register.
5 Commands by Subsystem *RST (Reset) (see page 798) Command Syntax *RST The *RST command places the instrument in a known state. Reset conditions are: Acquire Menu Mode Normal Realtime On Averaging Off # Averages 8 Analog Channel Menu Channel 1 On Channel 2 Off Volts/division 5.00 V Offset 0.00 Coupling DC Probe attenuation AutoProbe (if AutoProbe is connected), otherwise 1.
Commands by Subsystem 5 Digital Channel Menu (MSO models only) Channel 0 - 15 Off Labels Off Threshold TTL (1.4V) Display Menu Definite persistence Off Grid 33% Vectors On Quick Meas Menu Source Channel 1 Run Control Scope is running Time Base Menu Main time/division 100 us Main time base delay 0.00 s Delay time/division 500 ns Delay time base delay 0.00 s Reference center Mode main Vernier Off Trigger Menu Type Edge Mode Auto Coupling dc Source Channel 1 Level 0.
5 Commands by Subsystem Trigger Menu See Also Example Code Slope Positive HF Reject and noise reject Off Holdoff 60 ns External probe attenuation AutoProbe (if AutoProbe is connected), otherwise 1.0:1 External Units Volts External Impedance 1 M Ohm • "Introduction to Common (*) Commands" on page 128 ' RESET - This command puts the oscilloscope into a known state. ' This statement is very important for programs to work as expected.
5 Commands by Subsystem *SAV (Save) (see page 798) Command Syntax *SAV ::= {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} The *SAV command stores the current state of the instrument in a save register. The data parameter specifies the register where the data will be saved.
5 Commands by Subsystem *SRE (Service Request Enable) (see page 798) Command Syntax *SRE ::= integer with values defined in the following table. The *SRE command sets the bits in the Service Request Enable Register. The Service Request Enable Register contains a mask value for the bits to be enabled in the Status Byte Register. A one in the Service Request Enable Register enables the corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register. A zero disables the bit.
Commands by Subsystem 5 Table 43 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) (continued) Query Syntax Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Enables: 5 ESB Event Status Bit Interrupts when enabled conditions in the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) occur. 4 MAV Message Available Interrupts when messages are in the Output Queue. 3 --- --- (Not used.) 2 MSG Message Interrupts when an advisory has been displayed on the oscilloscope.
5 Commands by Subsystem *STB (Read Status Byte) (see page 798) Query Syntax *STB? The *STB? query returns the current value of the instrument's status byte. The MSS (Master Summary Status) bit is reported on bit 6 instead of the RQS (request service) bit. The MSS indicates whether or not the device has at least one reason for requesting service. Return Format ::= 0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 44 Status Byte Register (STB) (continued) NOTE See Also Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 6 RQS Request Service When polled, that the device is requesting service. MSS Master Summary Status When read (by *STB?), whether the device has a reason for requesting service. 5 ESB Event Status Bit An enabled condition in the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) has occurred. 4 MAV Message Available There are messages in the Output Queue.
5 Commands by Subsystem *TRG (Trigger) (see page 798) Command Syntax *TRG The *TRG command has the same effect as the :DIGitize command with no parameters.
Commands by Subsystem 5 *TST (Self Test) (see page 798) Query Syntax *TST? The *TST? query performs a self- test on the instrument. The result of the test is placed in the output queue. A zero indicates the test passed and a non- zero indicates the test failed. If the test fails, refer to the troubleshooting section of the Service Guide.
5 Commands by Subsystem *WAI (Wait To Continue) (see page 798) Command Syntax *WAI The *WAI command has no function in the oscilloscope, but is parsed for compatibility with other instruments.
5 Commands by Subsystem Root (:) Commands Control many of the basic functions of the oscilloscope and reside at the root level of the command tree. See "Introduction to Root (:) Commands" on page 153.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 45 Root (:) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :DIGitize [[,..,]] (see page 162) n/a ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 45 Root (:) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :OVLRegister? (see page 183) ::= integer in NR1 format. See OVLenable for :PRINt [] (see page 185) n/a ::= [][,..,] ::= {COLor | GRAYscale | PRINter0 | BMP8bit | BMP | PNG | NOFactors | FACTors} can be repeated up to 5 times.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACTivity (see page 798) Command Syntax :ACTivity The :ACTivity command clears the cumulative edge variables for the next activity query. Query Syntax :ACTivity? The :ACTivity? query returns whether there has been activity (edges) on the digital channels since the last query, and returns the current logic levels.
5 Commands by Subsystem :AER (Arm Event Register) (see page 798) Query Syntax :AER? The AER query reads the Arm Event Register. After the Arm Event Register is read, it is cleared. A "1" indicates the trigger system is in the armed state, ready to accept a trigger. The Armed Event Register is summarized in the Wait Trig bit of the Operation Status Event Register.
5 Commands by Subsystem :AUToscale (see page 798) Command Syntax :AUToscale :AUToscale [[,..,]] ::= CHANnel for the DSO models ::= {DIGital0,..,DIGital15 | POD1 | POD2 | CHANnel} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The parameter may be repeated up to 5 times.
5 Commands by Subsystem See Also • "Introduction to Root (:) Commands" on page 153 • ":AUToscale:CHANnels" on page 159 • ":AUToscale:AMODE" on page 158 Example Code ' AUTOSCALE - This command evaluates all the input signals and sets ' the correct conditions to display all of the active signals. myScope.WriteString ":AUTOSCALE" ' Same as pressing Autoscale key.
5 Commands by Subsystem :AUToscale:AMODE (see page 798) Command Syntax :AUToscale:AMODE ::= {NORMal | CURRent} The :AUTOscale:AMODE command specifies the acquisition mode that is set by subsequent :AUToscales. • When NORMal is selected, an :AUToscale command sets the NORMal acquisition type and the RTIMe (real- time) acquisition mode. • When CURRent is selected, the current acquisition type and mode are kept on subsequent :AUToscales.
5 Commands by Subsystem :AUToscale:CHANnels (see page 798) Command Syntax :AUToscale:CHANnels ::= {ALL | DISPlayed} The :AUTOscale:CHANnels command specifies which channels will be displayed on subsequent :AUToscales. • When ALL is selected, all channels that meet the requirements of :AUToscale will be displayed. • When DISPlayed is selected, only the channels that are turned on are autoscaled. Use the :VIEW or :BLANk root commands to turn channels on or off.
5 Commands by Subsystem :BLANk (see page 798) Command Syntax :BLANk [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CDISplay (see page 798) Command Syntax :CDISplay The :CDISplay command clears the display and resets all associated measurements. If the oscilloscope is stopped, all currently displayed data is erased. If the oscilloscope is running, all the data in active channels and functions is erased; however, new data is displayed on the next acquisition.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DIGitize (see page 798) Command Syntax :DIGitize [[,..,]] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15 | POD{1 | 2} | BUS{1 | 2} | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The parameter may be repeated up to 5 times.
Commands by Subsystem 5 ' less than or equal to the maximum sample rate, the full 1000 points ' will be digitized in a single acquisition. Now, use 1 us/div ' (10 us across the screen). 1000 divided by 10 us equals 100 MSa/s; ' because this is greater than the maximum sample rate by 5 times, ' only 400 points (or 1/5 the points) can be gathered on a single ' trigger. Keep in mind when the oscilloscope is running, ' communication with the computer interrupts data acquisition.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HWEenable (Hardware Event Enable Register) (see page 798) Command Syntax :HWEenable ::= 16-bit integer The :HWEenable command sets a mask in the Hardware Event Enable register. Set any of the following bits to "1" to enable bit 12 in the Operation Status Condition Register and potentially cause an SRQ (Service Request interrupt to be generated.
5 Commands by Subsystem See Also • "Introduction to Root (:) Commands" on page 153 • ":AER (Arm Event Register)" on page 155 • ":CHANnel:PROTection" on page 244 • ":EXTernal:PROTection" on page 273 • ":OPERegister[:EVENt] (Operation Status Event Register)" on page 179 • ":OVLenable (Overload Event Enable Register)" on page 181 • ":OVLRegister (Overload Event Register)" on page 183 • "*STB (Read Status Byte)" on page 146 • "*SRE (Service Request Enable)" on page 144 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series O
5 Commands by Subsystem :HWERegister:CONDition (Hardware Event Condition Register) (see page 798) Query Syntax :HWERegister:CONDition? The :HWERegister:CONDition? query returns the integer value contained in the Hardware Event Condition Register.
Commands by Subsystem 5 • ":OVLenable (Overload Event Enable Register)" on page 181 • ":OVLRegister (Overload Event Register)" on page 183 • "*STB (Read Status Byte)" on page 146 • "*SRE (Service Request Enable)" on page 144 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 167
5 Commands by Subsystem :HWERegister[:EVENt] (Hardware Event Event Register) (see page 798) Query Syntax :HWERegister[:EVENt]? The :HWERegister[:EVENt]? query returns the integer value contained in the Hardware Event Event Register.
Commands by Subsystem 5 • ":OPERegister:CONDition (Operation Status Condition Register)" on page 177 • ":OVLenable (Overload Event Enable Register)" on page 181 • ":OVLRegister (Overload Event Register)" on page 183 • "*STB (Read Status Byte)" on page 146 • "*SRE (Service Request Enable)" on page 144 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 169
5 Commands by Subsystem :MERGe (see page 798) Command Syntax :MERGe ::= {PMEMory0 | PMEMory1 | PMEMory2 | PMEMory3 | PMEMory4 | PMEMory5 | PMEMory6 | PMEMory7 | PMEMory8 | PMEMory9} The :MERGe command stores the contents of the active display in the specified pixel memory. The previous contents of the pixel memory are overwritten. The pixel memories are PMEMory0 through PMEMory9.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTEenable (Mask Test Event Enable Register) (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTEenable ::= 16-bit integer The :MTEenable command sets a mask in the Mask Test Event Enable register. Set any of the following bits to "1" to enable bit 9 in the Operation Status Condition Register and potentially cause an SRQ (Service Request interrupt to be generated.
5 Commands by Subsystem Return Format ::= integer in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTERegister[:EVENt] (Mask Test Event Event Register) (see page 798) Query Syntax :MTERegister[:EVENt]? The :MTERegister[:EVENt]? query returns the integer value contained in the Mask Test Event Event Register and clears the register.
5 Commands by Subsystem • ":OPEE (Operation Status Enable Register)" on page 175 • ":OPERegister:CONDition (Operation Status Condition Register)" on page 177 • ":OVLenable (Overload Event Enable Register)" on page 181 • ":OVLRegister (Overload Event Register)" on page 183 • "*STB (Read Status Byte)" on page 146 • "*SRE (Service Request Enable)" on page 144 174 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Commands by Subsystem 5 :OPEE (Operation Status Enable Register) (see page 798) Command Syntax :OPEE ::= 16-bit integer The :OPEE command sets a mask in the Operation Status Enable register. Set any of the following bits to "1" to enable bit 7 in the Status Byte Register and potentially cause an SRQ (Service Request interrupt to be generated.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 51 Operation Status Enable Register (OPEE) (continued) Query Syntax Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Enables: 5 Wait Trig Wait Trig Event when the trigger is armed. 4 --- --- (Not used.) 3 Run Running Event when the oscilloscope is running (not stopped). 2-0 --- --- (Not used.) :OPEE? The :OPEE? query returns the current value contained in the Operation Status Enable register as an integer number.
5 Commands by Subsystem :OPERegister:CONDition (Operation Status Condition Register) (see page 798) Query Syntax :OPERegister:CONDition? The :OPERegister:CONDition? query returns the integer value contained in the Operation Status Condition Register.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 52 Operation Status Condition Register (continued) Return Format Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 3 Run Running The oscilloscope is running (not stopped). 2-0 --- --- (Not used.) ::= integer in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :OPERegister[:EVENt] (Operation Status Event Register) (see page 798) Query Syntax :OPERegister[:EVENt]? The :OPERegister[:EVENt]? query returns the integer value contained in the Operation Status Event Register.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 53 Operation Status Event Register (continued) Return Format Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 3 Run Running The oscilloscope has gone from a stop state to a single or running state. 2-0 --- --- (Not used.) ::= integer in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :OVLenable (Overload Event Enable Register) (see page 798) Command Syntax :OVLenable ::= 16-bit integer The overload enable mask is an integer representing an input as described in the following table. The :OVLenable command sets the mask in the Overload Event Enable Register and enables the reporting of the Overload Event Register. If an overvoltage is sensed on a 50Ω input, the input will automatically switch to 1 MΩ input impedance.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 54 Overload Event Enable Register (OVL) (continued) Query Syntax Bit Description When Set (1 = High = True), Enables: 7 Channel 2 Fault Event when fault occurs on Channel 2 input. 6 Channel 1 Fault Event when fault occurs on Channel 1 input. 5 --- (Not used.) 4 External Trigger OVL Event when overload occurs on External Trigger input. 3 Channel 4 OVL Event when overload occurs on Channel 4 input.
5 Commands by Subsystem :OVLRegister (Overload Event Register) (see page 798) Query Syntax :OVLRegister? The :OVLRegister query returns the overload protection value stored in the Overload Event Register (OVLR). If an overvoltage is sensed on a 50Ω input, the input will automatically switch to 1 MΩ input impedance. A "1" indicates an overload has occurred. You can set analog channel input impedance to 50Ω on the 300 MHz, 500 MHz, and 1 GHz bandwidth oscilloscope models.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 55 Overload Event Register (OVLR) (continued) Return Format Bit Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 4 External Trigger OVL Overload has occurred on External Trigger input. 3 Channel 4 OVL Overload has occurred on Channel 4 input. 2 Channel 3 OVL Overload has occurred on Channel 3 input. 1 Channel 2 OVL Overload has occurred on Channel 2 input. 0 Channel 1 OVL Overload has occurred on Channel 1 input.
5 Commands by Subsystem :PRINt (see page 798) Command Syntax :PRINt [] ::= [][,..,] ::= {COLor | GRAYscale | PRINter0 | BMP8bit | BMP | PNG | NOFactors | FACTors} The parameter may be repeated up to 5 times. The PRINt command formats the output according to the currently selected format (device). If an option is not specified, the value selected in the Print Config menu is used.
5 Commands by Subsystem :RUN (see page 798) Command Syntax :RUN The :RUN command starts repetitive acquisitions. This is the same as pressing the Run key on the front panel. See Also • "Introduction to Root (:) Commands" on page 153 • ":SINGle" on page 188 • ":STOP" on page 190 Example Code ' RUN_STOP - (not executed in this example) ' - RUN starts the data acquisition for the active waveform display. ' - STOP stops the data acquisition and turns off AUTOSTORE. ' myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SERial (see page 798) Query Syntax :SERial? The :SERial? query returns the serial number of the instrument.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SINGle (see page 798) Command Syntax :SINGle The :SINGle command causes the instrument to acquire a single trigger of data. This is the same as pressing the Single key on the front panel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :STATus (see page 798) Query Syntax :STATus? ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :STOP (see page 798) Command Syntax :STOP The :STOP command stops the acquisition. This is the same as pressing the Stop key on the front panel.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TER (Trigger Event Register) (see page 798) Query Syntax :TER? The :TER? query reads the Trigger Event Register. After the Trigger Event Register is read, it is cleared. A one indicates a trigger has occurred. A zero indicates a trigger has not occurred. The Trigger Event Register is summarized in the TRG bit of the Status Byte Register (STB).
5 Commands by Subsystem :VIEW (see page 798) Command Syntax :VIEW ::= {CHANnel | PMEMory0,..,PMEMory9 | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15 | PMEMory0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire Commands Set the parameters for acquiring and storing data. See "Introduction to :ACQuire Commands" on page 193.
5 Commands by Subsystem Normal The :ACQuire:TYPE NORMal command sets the oscilloscope in the normal acquisition mode. For the majority of user models and signals, NORMal mode yields the best oscilloscope picture of the waveform. Averaging The :ACQuire:TYPE AVERage command sets the oscilloscope in the averaging mode. You can set the count by sending the :ACQuire:COUNt command followed by the number of averages. In this mode, the value for averages is an integer from 2 to 65536.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:AALias (see page 798) Query Syntax :ACQuire:AALias? The :ACQuire:AALias? query returns the current state of the oscilloscope acquisition anti- alias control. This control can be directly disabled or disabled automatically.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:COMPlete (see page 798) Command Syntax :ACQuire:COMPlete ::= 100; an integer in NR1 format The :ACQuire:COMPlete command affects the operation of the :DIGitize command. It specifies the minimum completion criteria for an acquisition. The parameter determines the percentage of the time buckets that must be "full" before an acquisition is considered complete.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :ACQuire:COUNt (see page 798) Command Syntax :ACQuire:COUNt ::= integer in NR1 format In averaging mode, the :ACQuire:COUNt command specifies the number of values to be averaged for each time bucket before the acquisition is considered to be complete for that time bucket. When :ACQuire:TYPE is set to AVERage, the count can be set to any value from 2 to 65536. NOTE Query Syntax The :ACQuire:COUNt 1 command has been deprecated.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:DAALias (see page 798) Command Syntax :ACQuire:DAALias ::= {DISable | AUTO} The :ACQuire:DAALias command sets the disable anti- alias mode of the oscilloscope. When set to DISable, anti- alias is always disabled. This is good for cases where dithered data is not desired. When set to AUTO, the oscilloscope turns off anti- alias control as needed. Such cases are when the FFT or differentiate math functions are silent.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :ACQuire:MODE (see page 798) Command Syntax :ACQuire:MODE ::= {RTIMe | ETIMe | SEGMented} The :ACQuire:MODE command sets the acquisition mode of the oscilloscope. • The :ACQuire:MODE RTIMe command sets the oscilloscope in real time mode. This mode is useful to inhibit equivalent time sampling at fast sweep speeds. Real time mode is not available when averaging (:ACQuire:TYPE AVERage).
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:POINts (see page 798) Query Syntax :ACQuire:POINts? The :ACQuire:POINts? query returns the number of data points that the hardware will acquire from the input signal. The number of points acquired is not directly controllable. To set the number of points to be transferred from the oscilloscope, use the command :WAVeform:POINts. The :WAVeform:POINts? query will return the number of points available to be transferred from the oscilloscope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :ACQuire:RSIGnal (see page 798) Command Syntax :ACQuire:RSIGnal ::= {OFF | OUT | IN} The :ACQuire:RSIGnal command selects the 10 MHz reference signal mode. • The OFF mode disables the oscilloscope's 10 MHz REF BNC connector. • The OUT mode is used to synchronize the timebase of two or more instruments. • The IN mode is used to supply a sample clock to the oscilloscope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:SEGMented:ANALyze (see page 798) Command Syntax NOTE :ACQuire:SEGMented:ANALyze This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. This command calculates measurement statistics and/or infinite persistence over all segments that have been acquired. It corresponds to the front panel Analyze Segments softkey which appears in both the Measurement Statistics and Segmented Memory Menus.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt (see page 798) Command Syntax :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt ::= an integer from 2 to 2000 (w/8M memory) in NR1 format NOTE This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. The :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt command sets the number of memory segments to acquire. The segmented memory acquisition mode is enabled with the :ACQuire:MODE command, and data is acquired using the :DIGitize, :SINGle, or :RUN commands.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex (see page 798) Command Syntax :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex ::= an integer from 2 to 2000 (w/8M memory) in NR1 format NOTE This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. The :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex command sets the index into the memory segments that have been acquired. The segmented memory acquisition mode is enabled with the :ACQuire:MODE command.
5 Commands by Subsystem Option Explicit Public Public Public Public myMgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager myScope As VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 varQueryResult As Variant strQueryResult As String Private Declare Sub Sleep Lib "kernel32" (ByVal dwMilliseconds As Long) Sub Main() On Error GoTo VisaComError ' Create the VISA COM I/O resource. Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("TCPIP0::130.29.70.228::inst0::INSTR") myScope.IO.
5 Commands by Subsystem For lngI = lngSegments To 1 Step -1 ' Set the segmented memory index. myScope.WriteString ":ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex " + CStr(lngI) myScope.WriteString ":ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex?" strQueryResult = myScope.ReadString Debug.Print "Acquisition memory segment index: " + strQueryResult ' Display the segment time tag. myScope.WriteString ":WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG?" dblTimeTag = myScope.ReadNumber Debug.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :ACQuire:SRATe (see page 798) Query Syntax :ACQuire:SRATe? The :ACQuire:SRATe? query returns the current oscilloscope acquisition sample rate. The sample rate is not directly controllable.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:TYPE (see page 798) Command Syntax :ACQuire:TYPE ::= {NORMal | AVERage | HRESolution | PEAK} The :ACQuire:TYPE command selects the type of data acquisition that is to take place. The acquisition types are: NORMal, AVERage, HRESolution, and PEAK. • The :ACQuire:TYPE NORMal command sets the oscilloscope in the normal mode. • The :ACQuire:TYPE AVERage command sets the oscilloscope in the averaging mode.
Commands by Subsystem See Also 5 • "Introduction to :ACQuire Commands" on page 193 • ":ACQuire:COUNt" on page 197 • ":ACQuire:MODE" on page 199 • ":DIGitize" on page 162 • ":WAVeform:TYPE" on page 655 • ":WAVeform:PREamble" on page 645 Example Code ' AQUIRE_TYPE - Sets the acquisition mode, which can be NORMAL, ' PEAK, or AVERAGE. myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :BUS Commands Control all oscilloscope functions associated with buses made up of digital channels. See "Introduction to :BUS Commands" on page 211.
5 Commands by Subsystem Introduction to :BUS Commands NOTE ::= {1 | 2} The BUS subsystem commands control the viewing, labeling, and digital channel makeup of two possible buses. These commands are only valid for the MSO models. Reporting the Setup Use :BUS? to query setup information for the BUS subsystem. Return Format The following is a sample response from the :BUS1? query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :BUS:BIT (see page 798) Command Syntax :BUS:BIT ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} ::= An integer, 1 or 2, is attached as a suffix to BUS and defines the bus that is affected by the command. ::= An integer, 0,..,15, is attached as a suffix to BIT and defines the digital channel that is affected by the command. The :BUS:BIT command includes or excludes the selected bit as part of the definition for the selected bus.
5 Commands by Subsystem :BUS:BITS (see page 798) Command Syntax :BUS:BITS , ::= (@,:, ...) where commas separate bits and colons define bit ranges. ::= An integer, 0,..,15, defines a digital channel affected by the command. ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} ::= An integer, 1 or 2, is attached as a suffix to BUS and defines the bus that is affected by the command.
5 Commands by Subsystem ' Include digital channels 1 through 5, 8, and 14 in bus 1: myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :BUS:CLEar (see page 798) Command Syntax :BUS:CLEar ::= An integer, 1 or 2, is attached as a suffix to BUS and defines the bus that is affected by the command. The :BUS:CLEar command excludes all of the digital channels from the selected bus definition. NOTE See Also This command is only valid for the MSO models.
5 Commands by Subsystem :BUS:DISPlay (see page 798) Command Syntax :BUS:DISplay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} ::= An integer, 1 or 2, is attached as a suffix to BUS and defines the bus that is affected by the command. The :BUS:DISPlay command enables or disables the view of the selected bus. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid for the MSO models. :BUS:DISPlay? The :BUS:DISPlay? query returns the display value of the selected bus.
5 Commands by Subsystem :BUS:LABel (see page 798) Command Syntax :BUS:LABel ::= any series of 10 or less characters as a quoted ASCII string. ::= An integer, 1 or 2, is attached as a suffix to BUS and defines the bus that is affected by the command. The :BUS:LABel command sets the bus label to the quoted string. Setting a label for a bus will also result in the name being added to the label list. NOTE This command is only valid for the MSO models.
5 Commands by Subsystem :BUS:MASK (see page 798) Command Syntax :BUS:MASK ::= 32-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= An integer, 1 or 2, is attached as a suffix to BUS and defines the bus that is affected by the command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate Commands Utility commands for viewing calibration status and for starting the user calibration procedure. See "Introduction to :CALibrate Commands" on page 219.
5 Commands by Subsystem • Starting the user calibration procedure.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CALibrate:DATE (see page 798) Query Syntax :CALibrate:DATE? The :CALibrate:DATE? query returns the date of the last calibration.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:LABel (see page 798) Command Syntax :CALibrate:LABel ::= quoted ASCII string of up to 32 characters in length, not including the quotes The CALibrate:LABel command saves a string that is up to 32 characters in length into the instrument's non- volatile memory. The string may be used to record calibration dates or other information as needed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:OUTPut (see page 798) Command Syntax :CALibrate:OUTPut ::= {TRIGgers | SOURce | DSOurce | MASK} The CALibrate:OUTPut command sets the signal that is available on the rear panel TRIG OUT BNC: • TRIGgers — pulse when a trigger event occurs. • SOURce — raw output of trigger comparator. • DSOurce — SOURce frequency divided by 8. • MASK — signal from mask test indicating a success or fail mask test.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:STARt (see page 798) Command Syntax :CALibrate:STARt The CALibrate:STARt command starts the user calibration procedure. NOTE See Also Before starting the user calibration procedure, you must set the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to UNPROTECTED, and you must connect BNC cables from the TRIG OUT connector to the analog channel inputs. See the User's Guide for details.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CALibrate:STATus (see page 798) Query Syntax :CALibrate:STATus? The :CALibrate:STATus? query returns the summary results of the last user calibration procedure.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:SWITch (see page 798) Query Syntax :CALibrate:SWITch? The :CALibrate:SWITch? query returns the rear- panel calibration protect (CAL PROTECT) switch state. The value PROTected indicates calibration is disabled, and UNPRotected indicates calibration is enabled.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CALibrate:TEMPerature (see page 798) Query Syntax :CALibrate:TEMPerature? The :CALibrate:TEMPerature? query returns the change in temperature since the last user calibration procedure.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:TIME (see page 798) Query Syntax :CALibrate:TIME? The :CALibrate:TIME? query returns the time of the last calibration.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel Commands Control all oscilloscope functions associated with individual analog channels or groups of channels. See "Introduction to :CHANnel Commands" on page 230.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 59 :CHANnel Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :CHANnel:PROBe:SKE W (see page 242) :CHANnel:PROBe:SKE W? (see page 242) ::= -100 ns to +100 ns in NR3 format ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :CHANnel:PROBe:STY Pe (see page 243) :CHANnel:PROBe:STY Pe? (see page 243) ::= {DIFFerential | SINGle} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :CHANnel:PROTectio n (see page 244) :C
5 Commands by Subsystem Reporting the Setup Use :CHANnel1?, :CHANnel2?, :CHANnel3? or :CHANnel4? to query setup information for the CHANnel subsystem. Return Format The following are sample responses from the :CHANnel? query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command. :CHAN1:RANG +40.0E+00;OFFS +0.00000E+00;COUP DC;IMP ONEM;DISP 1;BWL 0; INV 0;LAB "1";UNIT VOLT;PROB +10E+00;PROB:SKEW +0.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:BWLimit (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:BWLimit ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:BWLimit command controls an internal low- pass filter. When the filter is on, the bandwidth of the specified channel is limited to approximately 25 MHz.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CHANnel:COUPling (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:COUPling ::= {AC | DC} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:COUPling command selects the input coupling for the specified channel. The coupling for each analog channel can be set to AC or DC.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:DISPlay (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:DISPlay command turns the display of the specified channel on or off. Query Syntax :CHANnel:DISPlay? The :CHANnel:DISPlay? query returns the current display setting for the specified channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:IMPedance (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:IMPedance ::= {ONEMeg | FIFTy} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:IMPedance command selects the input impedance setting for the specified analog channel. The legal values for this command are ONEMeg (1 MΩ) and FIFTy (50Ω).
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:INVert (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:INVert ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:INVert command selects whether or not to invert the input signal for the specified channel. The inversion may be 1 (ON/inverted) or 0 (OFF/not inverted).
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CHANnel:LABel (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:LABel ::= quoted ASCII string ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models NOTE Label strings are 10 characters or less, and may contain any commonly used ASCII characters. Labels with more than 10 characters are truncated to 10 characters. Lower case characters are converted to upper case.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:OFFSet (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:OFFSet [] ::= Vertical offset value in NR3 format ::= {V | mV} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:OFFSet command sets the value that is represented at center screen for the selected channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROBe (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:PROBe ::= probe attenuation ratio in NR3 format ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The obsolete attenuation values X1, X10, X20, X100 are also supported. The :CHANnel:PROBe command specifies the probe attenuation factor for the selected channel. The probe attenuation factor may be 0.1 to 1000.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROBe:HEAD[:TYPE] (see page 798) Command Syntax NOTE This command is valid only for the 113xA Series probes. :CHANnel:PROBe:HEAD[:TYPE] ::= {SEND0 | SEND6 | SEND12 | SEND20 | DIFF0 | DIFF6 | DIFF12 | DIFF20 | NONE} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} The :CHANnel:PROBe:HEAD[:TYPE] command sets an analog channel probe head type and dB value. You can choose from: • SEND0 — Single- ended, 0dB. • SEND6 — Single- ended, 6dB.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROBe:ID (see page 798) Query Syntax :CHANnel:PROBe:ID? ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:PROBe:ID? query returns the type of probe attached to the specified oscilloscope channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROBe:SKEW (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:PROBe:SKEW ::= skew time in NR3 format ::= -100 ns to +100 ns ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} The :CHANnel:PROBe:SKEW command sets the channel- to- channel skew factor for the specified channel. Each analog channel can be adjusted + or - 100 ns for a total of 200 ns difference between channels.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CHANnel:PROBe:STYPe (see page 798) Command Syntax NOTE This command is valid only for the 113xA Series probes.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROTection (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:PROTection[:CLEar] ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} When the analog channel input impedance is set to 50Ω (on the 300 MHz, 500 MHz, and 1 GHz bandwidth oscilloscope models), the input channels are protected against overvoltage. When an overvoltage condition is sensed, the input impedance for the channel is automatically changed to 1 MΩ.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:RANGe (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:RANGe [] ::= vertical full-scale range value in NR3 format ::= {V | mV} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:RANGe command defines the full- scale vertical axis of the selected channel. When using 1:1 probe attenuation, legal values for the range are shown in the following table.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:SCALe (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:SCALe [] ::= vertical units per division in NR3 format ::= {V | mV} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:SCALe command sets the vertical scale, or units per division, of the selected channel. When using 1:1 probe attenuation, legal values for the scale are shown in the following table.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:UNITs (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:UNITs ::= {VOLT | AMPere} ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:UNITs command sets the measurement units for the connected probe. Select VOLT for a voltage probe and select AMPere for a current probe. Measurement results, channel sensitivity, and trigger level will reflect the measurement units you select.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:VERNier (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:VERNier ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:VERNier command specifies whether the channel's vernier (fine vertical adjustment) setting is ON (1) or OFF (0).
5 Commands by Subsystem :DIGital Commands Control all oscilloscope functions associated with individual digital channels. See "Introduction to :DIGital Commands" on page 249.
5 Commands by Subsystem Return Format The following is a sample response from the :DIGital0? query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command. :DIG0:DISP 0;THR +1.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DIGital:DISPlay (see page 798) Command Syntax :DIGital:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} ::= An integer, 0, 1,..,15, is attached as a suffix to the command and defines the logic channel that is affected by the command. The :DIGital:DISPlay command turns digital display on or off for the specified channel. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid for the MSO models.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DIGital:LABel (see page 798) Command Syntax :DIGital:LABel ::= any series of 10 or less characters as quoted ASCII string. ::= An integer, 0,..,15, is attached as a suffix to the command and defines the logic channel that is affected by the command. The :DIGital:LABel command sets the channel label to the string that follows.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DIGital:POSition (see page 798) Command Syntax :DIGital:POSition ::= integer in NR1 format. ::= An integer, 0, 1,..,15, is attached as a suffix to the command and defines the logic channel that is affected by the command. Channel Size Position Top Bottom Large 0-7 7 0 Medium 0-15 15 0 Small 0-31 31 0 The :DIGital:POSition command sets the position of the specified channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DIGital:SIZE (see page 798) Command Syntax :DIGital:SIZE ::= An integer, 0, 1,..,15, is attached as a suffix to the command and defines the logic channel that is affected by the command. ::= {SMALl | MEDium | LARGe} The :DIGital:SIZE command specifies the size of digital channels on the display. Sizes are set for all digital channels.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DIGital:THReshold (see page 798) Command Syntax :DIGital:THReshold ::= {CMOS | ECL | TTL | []} ::= -8.00 to +8.00 in NR3 format ::= {V | mV | uV} ::= An integer, 0, 1,..,15, is attached as a suffix to the command and defines the logic channel that is affected by the command. • TTL = 1.4V • CMOS = 2.5V • ECL = - 1.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay Commands Control how waveforms, graticule, and text are displayed and written on the screen. See "Introduction to :DISPlay Commands" on page 256.
5 Commands by Subsystem • Set waveform persistence. • Specify labels. • Save and Recall display data. Reporting the Setup Use :DISPlay? to query the setup information for the DISPlay subsystem. Return Format The following is a sample response from the :DISPlay? query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:CLEar (see page 798) Command Syntax :DISPlay:CLEar The :DISPlay:CLEar command clears the display and resets all associated measurements. If the oscilloscope is stopped, all currently displayed data is erased. If the oscilloscope is running, all of the data for active channels and functions is erased; however, new data is displayed on the next acquisition.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :DISPlay:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :DISPlay:DATA [][,][][,][] ::= {TIFF} ::= {GRATicule} ::= {MONochrome} ::= binary block data in IEEE-488.2 # format. The :DISPlay:DATA command writes trace memory data (a display bitmap) to the display or to one of the trace memories in the instrument. If a data format or area is specified, the :DISPlay:DATA command transfers the data directly to the display.
5 Commands by Subsystem NOTE If the format is TIFF, the only valid value area parameter is GRATicule, and the only valid palette parameter is MONOchrome. If the format is something other than TIFF, the only valid area parameter is SCReen, and the only valid values for palette are GRAYscale or COLor. Return Format ::= binary block data in IEEE-488.2 # format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:LABel (see page 798) Command Syntax :DISPlay:LABel ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :DISPlay:LABel command turns the analog and digital channel labels on and off. Query Syntax :DISPlay:LABel? The :DISPlay:LABel? query returns the display mode of the analog and digital labels.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:LABList (see page 798) Command Syntax :DISPlay:LABList ::= an ordered list of up to 75 labels, a maximum of 10 characters each, separated by newline characters. The :DISPlay:LABList command adds labels to the label list. Labels are added in alphabetical order. NOTE Query Syntax Labels that begin with the same alphabetic base string followed by decimal digits are considered duplicate labels.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:PERSistence (see page 798) Command Syntax :DISPlay:PERSistence ::= {MINimum | INFinite} The :DISPlay:PERSistence command specifies the persistence setting. MINimum indicates zero persistence and INFinite indicates infinite persistence. Use the :DISPlay:CLEar or :CDISplay root command to erase points stored by infinite persistence. Query Syntax :DISPlay:PERSistence? The :DISPlay:PERSistence? query returns the specified persistence value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :DISPlay:SOURce ::= {PMEMory0 | PMEMory1 | PMEMory2 | PMEMory3 | PMEMory4 | PMEMory5 | PMEMory6 | PMEMory7 | PMEMory8 | PMEMory9} PMEMory0-9 ::= pixel memory 0 through 9 The :DISPlay:SOURce command specifies the default source and destination for the :DISPlay:DATA command and query. PMEMory0- 9 correspond to the INTERN_0- 9 files found in the front panel Save/Recall menu.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:VECTors (see page 798) Command Syntax :DISPlay:VECTors ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :DISPlay:VECTors command turns vector display on or off. When vectors are turned on, the oscilloscope displays lines connecting sampled data points. When vectors are turned off, only the sampled data is displayed. Query Syntax :DISPlay:VECTors? The :DISPlay:VECTors? query returns whether vector display is on or off.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal Trigger Commands Control the input characteristics of the external trigger input. See "Introduction to :EXTernal Trigger Commands" on page 266.
Commands by Subsystem 5 The following is a sample response from the :EXTernal query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command. :EXT:BWL 0;IMP ONEM;RANG +8.0E+00;UNIT VOLT;PROB +1.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:BWLimit (see page 798) Command Syntax :EXTernal:BWLimit ::= {0 | OFF} The :EXTernal:BWLimit command is provided for product compatibility. The only legal value is 0 or OFF. Use the :TRIGger:HFReject command to limit bandwidth on the external trigger input. Query Syntax :EXTernal:BWLimit? The :EXTernal:BWLimit? query returns the current setting of the low- pass filter (always 0).
Commands by Subsystem 5 :EXTernal:IMPedance (see page 798) Command Syntax :EXTernal:IMPedance ::= {ONEMeg | FIFTy} The :EXTernal:IMPedance command selects the input impedance setting for the external trigger. The legal values for this command are ONEMeg (1 MΩ) and FIFTy (50Ω). NOTE Query Syntax You can set external trigger input impedance to FIFTy (50Ω) on the 2-channel, 300 MHz, 500 MHz, and 1 GHz bandwidth oscilloscope models.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:PROBe (see page 798) Command Syntax :EXTernal:PROBe ::= probe attenuation ratio in NR3 format The :EXTernal:PROBe command specifies the probe attenuation factor for the external trigger. The probe attenuation factor may be 0.1 to 1000. This command does not change the actual input sensitivity of the oscilloscope. It changes the reference constants for scaling the display factors and for setting trigger levels.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :EXTernal:PROBe:ID (see page 798) Query Syntax :EXTernal:PROBe:ID? The :EXTernal:PROBe:ID? query returns the type of probe attached to the external trigger input.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:PROBe:STYPe (see page 798) Command Syntax NOTE This command is valid only for the 113xA Series probes. :EXTernal:PROBe:STYPe ::= {DIFFerential | SINGle} The :EXTernal:PROBe:STYPe command sets the external trigger probe signal type (STYPe) to differential or single- ended when using the 113xA Series probes and determines how offset is applied.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :EXTernal:PROTection (see page 798) Command Syntax :EXTernal:PROTection[:CLEar] When the external trigger input impedance is set to 50Ω (on the 2- channel, 300 MHz, 500 MHz, and 1 GHz bandwidth oscilloscope models), the external trigger input is protected against overvoltage. When an overvoltage condition is sensed, the input impedance for the external trigger is automatically changed to 1 MΩ.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:RANGe (see page 798) Command Syntax :EXTernal:RANGe [] ::= vertical full-scale range value in NR3 format ::= {V | mV} The :EXTernal:RANGe command is provided for product compatibility. When using 1:1 probe attenuation: • In 2- channel models, the range can be set to 1.0 V or 8.0 V. • In 4- channel models, the range can only be set to 5.0 V. If the probe attenuation is changed, the range value is multiplied by the probe attenuation factor.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:UNITs (see page 798) Command Syntax :EXTernal:UNITs ::= {VOLT | AMPere} The :EXTernal:UNITs command sets the measurement units for the probe connected to the external trigger input. Select VOLT for a voltage probe and select AMPere for a current probe. Measurement results, channel sensitivity, and trigger level will reflect the measurement units you select.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion Commands Control functions in the measurement/storage module. See "Introduction to :FUNCtion Commands" on page 278. Table 65 :FUNCtion Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :FUNCtion:CENTer (see page 279) :FUNCtion:CENTer? (see page 279) ::= the current center frequency in NR3 format. The range of legal values is from 0 Hz to 25 GHz.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 65 :FUNCtion Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :FUNCtion:RANGe (see page 286) :FUNCtion:RANGe? (see page 286) ::= the full-scale vertical axis value in NR3 format. The range for ADD, SUBT, MULT is 8E-6 to 800E+3. The range for the INTegrate function is 8E-9 to 400E+3. The range for the DIFFerentiate function is 80E-3 to 8.0E12 (depends on current sweep speed). The range for the FFT function is 8 to 800 dBV.
5 Commands by Subsystem Introduction to :FUNCtion Commands The FUNCtion subsystem controls the math functions in the oscilloscope. Add, subtract, multiply, differentiate, integrate, square root, and FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) operations are available. These math operations only use the analog (vertical) channels. The SOURce1, DISPlay, RANGe, and OFFSet commands apply to any function. The SPAN, CENTer, and WINDow commands are only useful for FFT functions.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:CENTer (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:CENTer ::= the current center frequency in NR3 format. of legal values is from 0 Hz to 25 GHz. The range The :FUNCtion:CENTer command sets the center frequency when FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is selected. Query Syntax :FUNCtion:CENTer? The :FUNCtion:CENTer? query returns the current center frequency in Hertz.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:DISPlay (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :FUNCtion:DISPlay command turns the display of the function on or off. When ON is selected, the function performs as specified using the other FUNCtion commands. When OFF is selected, function is neither calculated nor displayed. Query Syntax :FUNCtion:DISPlay? The :FUNCtion:DISPlay? query returns whether the function display is on or off.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation ::= {ADD | SUBTract | MULTiply} The :FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation command sets the math operation for the g(t) source that can be used as the input to the FFT, INTegrate, DIFFerentiate, or SQRT functions: • ADD — Source1 + source2. • SUBTract — Source1 - source2. • MULTiply — Source1 * source2.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1 (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1 ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models The :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1 command selects the first input channel for the g(t) source that can be used as the input to the FFT, INTegrate, DIFFerentiate, or SQRT functions.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2 (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2 ::= CHANnel ::= {{1 | 2} | {3 | 4}} for 4ch models, depending on SOURce1 selection ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models The :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2 command selects the second input channel for the g(t) source that can be used as the input to the FFT, INTegrate, DIFFerentiate, or SQRT functions.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:OFFSet (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:OFFSet ::= the value at center screen in NR3 format. The :FUNCtion:OFFSet command sets the voltage or vertical value represented at center screen for the selected function. The range of legal values is generally +/- 10 times the current scale of the selected function, but will vary by function.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:OPERation (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:OPERation ::= {ADD | SUBTract | MULTiply | INTegrate | DIFFerentiate | FFT | SQRT} The :FUNCtion:OPERation command sets the desired waveform math operation: • ADD — Source1 + source2. • SUBTract — Source1 - source2. • MULTiply — Source1 * source2. • INTegrate — Integrate the selected waveform source. • DIFFerentiate — Differentiate the selected waveform source.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:RANGe (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:RANGe ::= the full-scale vertical axis value in NR3 format. The :FUNCtion:RANGe command defines the full- scale vertical axis for the selected function. Query Syntax :FUNCtion:RANGe? The :FUNCtion:RANGe? query returns the current full- scale range value for the selected function. Return Format ::= the full-scale vertical axis value in NR3 format.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :FUNCtion:REFerence (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:REFerence ::= the current reference level in NR3 format. The :FUNCtion:REFerence command sets the voltage or vertical value represented at center screen for the selected function. The range of legal values is generally +/- 10 times the current scale of the selected function, but will vary by function.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:SCALe (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SCALe [] ::= integer in NR1 format ::= {V | dB} The :FUNCtion:SCALe command sets the vertical scale, or units per division, of the selected function. Legal values for the scale depend on the selected function. Query Syntax :FUNCtion:SCALe? The :FUNCtion:SCALe? query returns the current scale value for the selected function.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:SOURce1 (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SOURce1 ::= {CHANnel | GOFT} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models The :FUNCtion:SOURce1 command is used for any :FUNCtion:OPERation selection (including the ADD, SUBTract, or MULTiply channel math operations and the FFT, INTegrate, DIFFerentiate, or SQRT transforms). This command selects the first source for channel math operations or the single source for the transforms.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:SOURce2 (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SOURce2 ::= {CHANnel | NONE} ::= {{1 | 2} | {3 | 4}} for 4ch models, depending on SOURce1 selection ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models The :FUNCtion:SOURce2 command is only used when an FFT (Fast Fourier Transform), DIFF, or INT operation is selected (see the:FUNCtion:OPERation command for more information about selecting an operation).
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:SPAN (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SPAN ::= the current frequency span in NR3 format. Legal values are 1 Hz to 100 GHz. If you set the frequency span to a value outside of the legal range, the step size is automatically set to the nearest legal value. The :FUNCtion:SPAN command sets the frequency span of the display (left graticule to right graticule) when FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is selected.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:WINDow (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:WINDow ::= {RECTangular | HANNing | FLATtop | BHARris} The :FUNCtion:WINDow command allows the selection of four different windowing transforms or operations for the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) function. The FFT operation assumes that the time record repeats.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy Commands Set and query the selection of hardcopy device and formatting options. See "Introduction to :HARDcopy Commands" on page 294.
5 Commands by Subsystem Introduction to :HARDcopy Commands The HARDcopy subsystem provides commands to set and query the selection of hardcopy device and formatting options such as inclusion of instrument settings (FACTors) and generation of formfeed (FFEed). :HARDC is an acceptable short form for :HARDcopy. Reporting the Setup Use :HARDcopy? to query setup information for the HARDcopy subsystem. Return Format The following is a sample response from the :HARDcopy? query.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :HARDcopy:AREA (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:AREA ::= SCReen The :HARDcopy:AREA command controls what part of the display area is printed. Currently, the only legal choice is SCReen. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:AREA? The :HARDcopy:AREA? query returns the selected display area.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:APRinter (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:APRinter ::= { | } ::= integer index of printer in list ::= name of printer in list The :HARDcopy:APRinter command sets the active printer. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:APRinter? The :HARDcopy:APRinter? query returns the name of the active printer.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:FACTors (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:FACTors ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The HARDcopy:FACTors command controls whether the scale factors are output on the hardcopy dump. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:FACTors? The :HARDcopy:FACTors? query returns a flag indicating whether oscilloscope instrument settings are output on the hardcopy.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:FFEed (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:FFEed ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The HARDcopy:FFEed command controls whether a formfeed is output between the screen image and factors of a hardcopy dump. ON (or 1) is only valid when PRINter0 or PRINter1 is set as the :HARDcopy:FORMat type. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:FFEed? The :HARDcopy:FFEed? query returns a flag indicating whether a formfeed is output at the end of the hardcopy dump.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:INKSaver (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:INKSaver ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The HARDcopy:INKSaver command controls whether the graticule colors are inverted or not. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:INKSaver? The :HARDcopy:INKSaver? query returns a flag indicating whether graticule colors are inverted or not.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:LAYout (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:LAYout ::= {LANDscape | PORTrait} The :HARDcopy:LAYout command sets the hardcopy layout mode. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:LAYout? The :HARDcopy:LAYout? query returns the selected hardcopy layout mode.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :HARDcopy:PALette (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:PALette ::= {COLor | GRAYscale | NONE} The :HARDcopy:PALette command sets the hardcopy palette color. NOTE Query Syntax If no printer is connected, NONE is the only valid parameter. :HARDcopy:PALette? The :HARDcopy:PALette? query returns the selected hardcopy palette color.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST (see page 798) Query Syntax :HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST? The :HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST? query returns a list of available printers. The list can be empty. Return Format ::= [] ...
Commands by Subsystem 5 :HARDcopy:STARt (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:STARt The :HARDcopy:STARt command starts a print job.
5 Commands by Subsystem :LISTer Commands Table 67 :LISTer Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :LISTer:DATA? (see page 305) ::= comma-separated data with newlines at the end of each row :LISTer:DISPlay {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 306) :LISTer:DISPlay? (see page 306) {0 | 1} Introduction to :LISTer Commands 304 The LISTer subsystem is used to turn on/off the serial decode Lister display and return data from the Lister display.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :LISTer:DATA (see page 798) Query Syntax :LISTer:DATA? The :LISTer:DATA? query returns the lister data.
5 Commands by Subsystem :LISTer:DISPlay (see page 798) Command Syntax :LISTer:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :LISTer:DISPlay command turns on or off the on- screen lister display. Query Syntax :LISTer:DISPlay? The :LISTer:DISPlay? query returns lister display setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer Commands Set and query the settings of X- axis markers (X1 and X2 cursors) and the Y- axis markers (Y1 and Y2 cursors). See "Introduction to :MARKer Commands" on page 308.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 68 :MARKer Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MARKer:Y2Position [suffix] (see page 316) :MARKer:Y2Position? (see page 316) ::= Y2 cursor position value in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {V | mV | dB} ::= Y2 cursor position value in NR3 format n/a :MARKer:YDELta? (see page 317) ::= Y cursors delta value in NR3 format Introduction to :MARKer Commands The MARKer subsystem commands set and qu
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:MODE (see page 798) Command Syntax :MARKer:MODE ::= {OFF | MEASurement | MANual | WAVeform} The :MARKer:MODE command sets the cursors mode: • OFF — removes the cursor information from the display. • MANual — enables manual placement of the X and Y cursors. If the front- panel cursors are off, or are set to the front- panel Hex or Binary mode, setting :MARKer:MODE MANual will put the cursors in the front- panel Normal mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:X1Position (see page 798) Command Syntax :MARKer:X1Position [suffix] ::= X1 cursor position in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps | Hz | kHz | MHz} The :MARKer:X1Position command: • Sets :MARKer:MODE to MANual if it is not currently set to WAVeform (see ":MARKer:MODE" on page 309). • Sets the X1 cursor position to the specified value. Query Syntax :MARKer:X1Position? The :MARKer:X1Position? query returns the current X1 cursor position.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:X1Y1source (see page 798) Command Syntax :MARKer:X1Y1source ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MARKer:X1Y1source command sets the source for the cursors. The channel you specify must be enabled for cursors to be displayed. If the channel or function is not on, an error message is issued.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:X2Position (see page 798) Command Syntax :MARKer:X2Position [suffix] ::= X2 cursor position in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps | Hz | kHz | MHz} The :MARKer:X2Position command: • Sets :MARKer:MODE to MANual if it is not currently set to WAVeform (see ":MARKer:MODE" on page 309). • Sets the X2 cursor position to the specified value. Query Syntax :MARKer:X2Position? The :MARKer:X2Position? query returns current X2 cursor position.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:X2Y2source (see page 798) Command Syntax :MARKer:X2Y2source ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MARKer:X2Y2source command sets the source for the cursors. The channel you specify must be enabled for cursors to be displayed. If the channel or function is not on, an error message is issued.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:XDELta (see page 798) Query Syntax :MARKer:XDELta? The MARKer:XDELta? query returns the value difference between the current X1 and X2 cursor positions. Xdelta = (Value at X2 cursor) - (Value at X1 cursor) NOTE Return Format If the front-panel cursors are off, the marker position values are not defined. Make sure to set :MARKer:MODE to MANual or WAVeform to put the cursors in the front-panel Normal mode. ::= difference value in NR3 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:Y1Position (see page 798) Command Syntax :MARKer:Y1Position [suffix] ::= Y1 cursor position in NR3 format ::= {mV | V | dB} If the :MARKer:MODE is not currently set to WAVeform (see ":MARKer:MODE" on page 309), the :MARKer:Y1Position command: • Sets :MARKer:MODE to MANual. • Sets the Y1 cursor position to the specified value. When the :MARKer:MODE is set to WAVeform, Y positions cannot be set.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:Y2Position (see page 798) Command Syntax :MARKer:Y2Position [suffix] ::= Y2 cursor position in NR3 format ::= {mV | V | dB} If the :MARKer:MODE is not currently set to WAVeform (see ":MARKer:MODE" on page 309), the :MARKer:Y1Position command: • Sets :MARKer:MODE to MANual. • Sets the Y2 cursor position to the specified value. When the :MARKer:MODE is set to WAVeform, Y positions cannot be set.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:YDELta (see page 798) Query Syntax :MARKer:YDELta? The :MARKer:YDELta? query returns the value difference between the current Y1 and Y2 cursor positions. Ydelta = (Value at Y2 cursor) - (Value at Y1 cursor) NOTE Return Format If the front-panel cursors are off or are set to Binary or Hex Mode, the marker position values are not defined. Make sure to set :MARKer:MODE to MANual or WAVeform to put the cursors in the front-panel Normal mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure Commands Select automatic measurements to be made and control time markers. See "Introduction to :MEASure Commands" on page 324. Table 69 :MEASure Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:CLEar (see page 326) n/a n/a :MEASure:COUNter [] (see page 327) :MEASure:COUNter? [] (see page 327) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 69 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:FALLtime [] (see page 334) :MEASure:FALLtime? [] (see page 334) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 69 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:PHASe [] [,] (see page 340) :MEASure:PHASe? [] [,] (see page 340) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= the phase angle value in degrees in NR3 format :MEASure:PREShoot [] (see page 341) :MEASure:PREShoot? [] (see page 341) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} <
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 69 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:SOURce [,] (see page 349) :MEASure:SOURce? (see page 349) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 69 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :MEASure:TVALue? , [] [,] (see page 356) ::= voltage level that the waveform must cross. ::= direction of the waveform when is crossed. ::= transitions reported.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 69 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:VPP [] (see page 363) :MEASure:VPP? [] (see page 363) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= voltage peak-to-peak of the selected waveform in NR3 format :MEASure:VRATio [] [,] (see page 340) :MEASure:VRATio? [] [,] (see page 364) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MA
5 Commands by Subsystem Introduction to :MEASure Commands The commands in the MEASure subsystem are used to make parametric measurements on displayed waveforms. Measurement Setup To make a measurement, the portion of the waveform required for that measurement must be displayed on the oscilloscope screen.
Commands by Subsystem 5 Return Format The following is a sample response from the :MEASure? query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:CLEar (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:CLEar This command clears all selected measurements and markers from the screen.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:COUNter (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:COUNter [] ::= { | CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= DIGital0,..,DIGital15 for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:COUNter command installs a screen measurement and starts a counter measurement.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:DEFine (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:DEFine ::= {DELay | THResholds} The :MEASure:DEFine command sets up the definition for measurements by specifying the delta time or threshold values. Changing these values may affect the results of other measure commands. The table below identifies which measurement results that can be affected by redefining the DELay specification or the THResholds values.
5 Commands by Subsystem This command defines the behavior of the :MEASure:DELay? query by specifying the start and stop edge to be used. specifies the slope and edge number on source1. specifies the slope and edge number on source2.
5 Commands by Subsystem Return Format for = DELay: { | | ,} for = THResholds and = PERCent: THR,PERC,,, , , ::= A number specifying the upper, middle, and lower threshold percentage values between Vbase and Vtop in NR3 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:DELay (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:DELay [][,] , ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:DELay command places the instrument in the continuous measurement mode and starts a delay measurement.
5 Commands by Subsystem Vtop. If you want to move the delay measurement point nearer to Vtop or Vbase, you must change the threshold values with the :MEASure:DEFine THResholds command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:DUTYcycle (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:DUTYcycle [] ::= { | CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= DIGital0,..,DIGital15 for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:DUTYcycle command installs a screen measurement and starts a duty cycle measurement on the current :MEASure:SOURce.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:FALLtime (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:FALLtime [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:FALLtime command installs a screen measurement and starts a fall- time measurement. For highest measurement accuracy, set the sweep speed as fast as possible, while leaving the falling edge of the waveform on the display.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:FREQuency (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:FREQuency [] ::= { | CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= DIGital0,..,DIGital15 for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:FREQuency command installs a screen measurement and starts a frequency measurement.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:NWIDth (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:NWIDth [] ::= { | CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= DIGital0,..,DIGital15 for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:NWIDth command installs a screen measurement and starts a negative pulse width measurement.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:OVERshoot (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:OVERshoot [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:OVERshoot command installs a screen measurement and starts an overshoot measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem • ":MEASure:VTOP" on page 367 • ":MEASure:VBASe" on page 360 • ":MEASure:VMIN" on page 362 338 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:PERiod (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:PERiod [] ::= { | CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= DIGital0,..,DIGital15 for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:PERiod command installs a screen measurement and starts the period measurement.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:PHASe (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:PHASe [][,] , ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:PHASe command places the instrument in the continuous measurement mode and starts a phase measurement.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:PREShoot (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:PREShoot [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:PREShoot command installs a screen measurement and starts a preshoot measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:PWIDth (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:PWIDth [] ::= { | CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= DIGital0,..,DIGital15 for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:PWIDth command installs a screen measurement and starts the positive pulse width measurement.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:RESults (see page 798) Query Syntax :MEASure:RESults? The :MEASure:RESults? query returns the results of the continuously displayed measurements. The response to the MEASure:RESults? query is a list of comma- separated values. If more than one measurement is running continuously, the :MEASure:RESults return values are duplicated for each continuous measurement from the first to last (left to right) result displayed.
5 Commands by Subsystem Private Declare Sub Sleep Lib "kernel32" (ByVal dwMilliseconds As Long) Sub Main() On Error GoTo VisaComError ' Create the VISA COM I/O resource. Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("TCPIP0::130.29.70.228::inst0::INSTR") ' Initialize. myScope.IO.Clear ' Clear the interface. myScope.WriteString "*RST" ' Reset to the defaults. myScope.WriteString "*CLS" ' Clear the status data structures. myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 ValueColumnArray(5) = "Std_Dev" ValueColumnArray(6) = "Count" Dim ValueColumn As Variant For Each ResultType In ResultsTypeArray myScope.WriteString ":MEASure:STATistics " + ResultType ' Get the statistics results. Dim intCounter As Integer intCounter = 0 myScope.WriteString ":MEASure:RESults?" ResultsList() = myScope.ReadList For Each Measurement In MeasurementArray If ResultType = "ON" Then ' All statistics.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:RISetime (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure: RISetime [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:RISetime command installs a screen measurement and starts a rise- time measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:SDEViation (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:SDEViation [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:SDEViation command installs a screen measurement and starts std deviation measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:SHOW (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:SHOW ::= {1 | ON} The :MEASure:SHOW command enables markers for tracking measurements on the display. This feature is always on. Query Syntax :MEASure:SHOW? The :MEASure:SHOW? query returns the current state of the markers.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:SOURce [,] , ::= { | CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | EXTernal} ::= DIGital0,..,DIGital15 for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:SOURce command sets the default sources for measurements.
5 Commands by Subsystem Example Code ' MEASURE - The commands in the MEASURE subsystem are used to make ' measurements on displayed waveforms. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:SOURCE CHANNEL1" ' Source to measure. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:FREQUENCY?" ' Query for frequency. varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Read frequency. MsgBox "Frequency:" + vbCrLf _ + FormatNumber(varQueryResult / 1000, 4) + " kHz" myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:DUTYCYCLE?" ' Query for duty cycle. varQueryResult = myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:STATistics (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:STATistics ::= {{ON | 1} | CURRent | MINimum | MAXimum | MEAN | STDDev | COUNt} The :MEASure:STATistics command determines the type of information returned by the :MEASure:RESults? query. ON means all the statistics are on. Query Syntax :MEASure:STATistics? The :MEASure:STATistics? query returns the current statistics mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:STATistics:INCRement (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:STATistics:INCRement This command updates the statistics once (incrementing the count by one) using the current measurement values. It corresponds to the front panel Increment Statistics softkey in the Measurement Statistics Menu. This command lets you, for example, gather statistics over multiple pulses captured in a single acquisition.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:STATistics:RESet (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:STATistics:RESet This command resets the measurement statistics, zeroing the counts. Note that the measurement (statistics) configuration is not deleted.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:TEDGe (see page 798) Query Syntax :MEASure:TEDGe? [,] ::= direction of the waveform. A rising slope is indicated by a space or plus sign (+). A falling edge is indicated by a minus sign (-). ::= the transition to be reported. If the occurrence number is one, the first crossing from the left screen edge is reported. If the number is two, the second crossing is reported, etc.
Commands by Subsystem NOTE Return Format 5 This query is not available if the source is FFT (Fast Fourier Transform). ::= time in seconds of the specified transition in NR3 format :MEASure:TEDGe Code ' Make a delay measurement between channel 1 and 2. Dim dblChan1Edge1 As Double Dim dblChan2Edge1 As Double Dim dblChan1Edge2 As Double Dim dblDelay As Double Dim dblPeriod As Double Dim dblPhase As Double ' Query time at 1st rising edge on ch1. myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:TVALue (see page 798) Query Syntax :MEASure:TVALue? , [][,] ::= the vertical value that the waveform must cross. The value can be volts or a math function value such as dB, Vs, or V/s. ::= direction of the waveform. A rising slope is indicated by a plus sign (+). A falling edge is indicated by a minus sign (-). ::= the transition to be reported. If the occurrence number is one, the first crossing is reported.
Commands by Subsystem 5 ::= time in seconds of the specified value crossing in NR3 format See Also • "Introduction to :MEASure Commands" on page 324 • ":MEASure:TEDGe" on page 354 • ":MEASure:VTIMe" on page 366 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 357
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VAMPlitude (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VAMPlitude [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VAMPlitude command installs a screen measurement and starts a vertical amplitude measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VAVerage (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VAVerage [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VAVerage command installs a screen measurement and starts an average value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VBASe (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VBASe [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VBASe command installs a screen measurement and starts a waveform base value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VMAX (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VMAX [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VMAX command installs a screen measurement and starts a maximum vertical value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VMIN (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VMIN [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VMIN command installs a screen measurement and starts a minimum vertical value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VPP (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VPP [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VPP command installs a screen measurement and starts a vertical peak- to- peak measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VRATio (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VRATio [][,] , ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VRATio command places the instrument in the continuous measurement mode and starts a ratio measurement.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VRMS (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VRMS [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VRMS command installs a screen measurement and starts a dc RMS value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VTIMe (see page 798) Query Syntax :MEASure:VTIMe? [,] ::= time from trigger in seconds ::= { | CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= DIGital0,..
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:VTOP (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VTOP [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VTOP command installs a screen measurement and starts a waveform top value measurement. NOTE Query Syntax This query is not available if the source is FFT (Fast Fourier Transform).
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:XMAX (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:XMAX [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:XMAX command installs a screen measurement and starts an X- at- Max- Y measurement on the selected window. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:XMIN (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:XMIN [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:XMIN command installs a screen measurement and starts an X- at- Min- Y measurement on the selected window. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt Commands The MTESt subsystem commands and queries control the mask test features. See "Introduction to :MTESt Commands" on page 372.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 70 :MTESt Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:OUTPut (see page 388) :MTESt:OUTPut? (see page 388) ::= {FAIL | PASS} :MTESt:RMODe (see page 389) :MTESt:RMODe? (see page 389) ::= {FORever | TIME | SIGMa | WAVeforms} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: MEASure {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 390) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: MEASure? (see page 390) {0 | 1} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: PRINt {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see pa
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 70 :MTESt Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:SCALe:Y2 (see page 401) :MTESt:SCALe:Y2? (see page 401) ::= Y2 value in NR3 format :MTESt:SOURce (see page 402) :MTESt:SOURce? (see page 402) ::= {CHANnel | NONE} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models n/a :MTESt:TITLe? (see page 403) ::= a string of up to 128 ASCII characters Introduction to :MTESt
Commands by Subsystem 5 Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("TCPIP0::130.29.70.228::inst0::INSTR") myScope.IO.Clear ' Clear the interface. ' Make sure oscilloscope is running. myScope.WriteString ":RUN" ' Set mask test termination conditions. myScope.WriteString ":MTESt:RMODe SIGMa" myScope.WriteString ":MTESt:RMODe?" strQueryResult = myScope.ReadString Debug.Print "Mask test termination mode: " + strQueryResult myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem lngElapsed = 0 Do While lngElapsed <= lngTimeout myScope.WriteString ":OPERegister:CONDition?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Operation Status Condition Register MTE bit (bit 9, &H200). If (varQueryResult And &H200) <> 0 Then Exit Do Else Sleep 100 ' Small wait to prevent excessive queries. lngElapsed = lngElapsed + 100 End If Loop ' Look for RUN bit = stopped (mask test termination). lngElapsed = 0 Do While lngElapsed <= lngTimeout myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:AMASk:CREate (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:CREate The :MTESt:AMASk:CREate command automatically constructs a mask around the current selected channel, using the tolerance parameters defined by the :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta, :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta, and :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs commands. The mask only encompasses the portion of the waveform visible on the display, so you must ensure that the waveform is acquired and displayed consistently to obtain repeatable results.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce command selects the source for the interpretation of the :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta and :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta parameters when :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs is set to CURRent.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs ::= {CURRent | DIVisions} The :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs command alters the way the mask test subsystem interprets the tolerance parameters for automasking as defined by :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta and :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta commands. • CURRent — the mask test subsystem uses the units as set by the :CHANnel:UNITs command, usually time for ΔX and voltage for ΔY.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta ::= X delta value in NR3 format The :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta command sets the tolerance in the X direction around the waveform for the automasking feature. The absolute value of the tolerance will be added and subtracted to horizontal values of the waveform to determine the boundaries of the mask.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta ::= Y delta value in NR3 format The :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta command sets the vertical tolerance around the waveform for the automasking feature. The absolute value of the tolerance will be added and subtracted to vertical values of the waveform to determine the boundaries of the mask.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms (see page 798) Query Syntax :MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms? [CHANnel] ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms? query returns the total number of failed waveforms in the current mask test run. This count is for all regions and all waveforms. Return Format ::= number of failed waveforms in NR1 format.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:COUNt:RESet (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:COUNt:RESet The :MTESt:COUNt:RESet command resets the mask statistics.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:COUNt:TIME (see page 798) Query Syntax :MTESt:COUNt:TIME? The :MTESt:COUNt:TIME? query returns the elapsed time in the current mask test run. Return Format
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms (see page 798) Query Syntax :MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms? The :MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms? query returns the total number of waveforms acquired in the current mask test run. Return Format ::= number of waveforms in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:DATA ::= binary block data in IEEE 488.2 # format. The :MTESt:DATA command loads a mask from binary block data. Query Syntax :MTESt:DATA? The :MTESt:DATA? query returns a mask in binary block data format. The format for the data transmission is the # format defined in the IEEE 488.2 specification. Return Format ::= binary block data in IEEE 488.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:DELete (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:DELete The :MTESt:DELete command clears the currently loaded mask.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:ENABle (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:ENABle ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:ENABle command enables or disables the mask test features. • ON — Enables the mask test features. • OFF — Disables the mask test features. Query Syntax :MTESt:ENABle? The :MTESt:ENABle? query returns the current state of mask test features.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:LOCK (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:LOCK ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:LOCK command enables or disables the mask lock feature: • ON — Locks a mask to the SOURce. As the vertical or horizontal scaling or position of the SOURce changes, the mask is redrawn accordingly. • OFF — The mask is static and does not move. Query Syntax :MTESt:LOCK? The :MTESt:LOCK? query returns the current mask lock setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:OUTPut (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:OUTPut ::= {FAIL | PASS} The :MTESt:OUTPut command selects the mask test output condition: • FAIL — the output occurs when there are mask test failures. • PASS — the output occurs when the mask test passes. You can place the mask test signal on the rear panel TRIG OUT BNC using the ":CALibrate:OUTPut" on page 223 command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:RMODe (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe ::= {FORever | SIGMa | TIME | WAVeforms} The :MTESt:RMODe command specifies the termination conditions for the mask test: • FORever — the mask test runs until it is turned off. • SIGMa — the mask test runs until the Sigma level is reached. This level is set by the ":MTESt:RMODe:SIGMa" on page 394 command. • TIME — the mask test runs for a fixed amount of time.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure command sets measuring only mask failures on or off. When ON, measurements and measurement statistics run only on waveforms that contain a mask violation; passing waveforms do not affect measurements and measurement statistics. This mode is not available when the acquisition mode is set to Averaging.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt command sets printing on mask failures on or off. NOTE Setting :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt ON automatically sets :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE OFF. See ":HARDcopy Commands" on page 293 for more information on setting the hardcopy device and formatting options.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE command sets saving on mask failures on or off. NOTE Setting :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE ON automatically sets :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt OFF. See ":SAVE Commands" on page 415 for more information on save options.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP command sets stopping on a mask failure on or off. When this setting is ON and a mask violation is detected, the mask test is stopped and the acquisition system is stopped. Query Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP? The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP? query returns the current mask failure stop setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:SIGMa (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:SIGMa ::= from 0.1 to 9.3 in NR3 format When the :MTESt:RMODe command is set to SIGMa, the :MTESt:RMODe:SIGMa command sets the test sigma level to which a mask test runs. Test sigma is the best achievable process sigma, assuming no failures. (Process sigma is calculated using the number of failures per test.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:RMODe:TIME (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:TIME ::= from 1 to 86400 in NR3 format When the :MTESt:RMODe command is set to TIME, the :MTESt:RMODe:TIME command sets the number of seconds for a mask test to run. Query Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:TIME? The :MTESt:RMODe:TIME? query returns the number of seconds currently set.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms ::= number of waveforms in NR1 format from 1 to 2,000,000,000 When the :MTESt:RMODe command is set to WAVeforms, the :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms command sets the number of waveform acquisitions that are mask tested. Query Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms? The :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms? query returns the number of waveforms currently set.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SCALe:BIND (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:BIND ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:SCALe:BIND command enables or disables Bind 1 & 0 Levels (Bind - 1 & 0 Levels for inverted masks) control: • ON — If the Bind 1 & 0 Levels control is enabled, the 1 Level and the 0 Level controls track each other. Adjusting either the 1 Level or the 0 Level control shifts the position of the mask up or down without changing its size.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SCALe:X1 (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:X1 ::= X1 value in NR3 format The :MTESt:SCALe:X1 command defines where X=0 in the base coordinate system used for mask testing. The other X- coordinate is defined by the :MTESt:SCALe:XDELta command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:SCALe:XDELta (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:XDELta ::= X delta value in NR3 format The :MTESt:SCALe:XDELta command defines the position of the X2 marker with respect to the X1 marker. In the mask test coordinate system, the X1 marker defines where X=0; thus, the X2 marker defines where X=1.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SCALe:Y1 (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:Y1 ::= Y1 value in NR3 format The :MTESt:SCALe:Y1 command defines where Y=0 in the coordinate system for mask testing. All Y values of vertices in the coordinate system are defined with respect to the boundaries set by SCALe:Y1 and SCALe:Y2 according to the equation: Y = (Y * (Y2 - Y1)) + Y1 Thus, if you set Y1 to 100 mV, and Y2 to 1 V, a Y value of 0.100 in a vertex is at 190 mV.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SCALe:Y2 (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:Y2 ::= Y2 value in NR3 format The :MTESt:SCALe:Y2 command defines the Y2 marker in the coordinate system for mask testing. All Y values of vertices in the coordinate system are defined with respect to the boundaries defined by SCALe:Y1 and SCALe:Y2 according to the following equation: Y = (Y * (Y2 - Y1)) + Y1 Thus, if you set Y1 to 100 mV, and Y2 to 1 V, a Y value of 0.100 in a vertex is at 190 mV.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:SOURce ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MTESt:SOURce command selects the channel which is configured by the commands contained in a mask file when it is loaded. Query Syntax :MTESt:SOURce? The :MTESt:SOURce? query returns the channel which is configured by the commands contained in the current mask file.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:TITLe (see page 798) Query Syntax :MTESt:TITLe? The :MTESt:TITLe? query returns the mask title which is a string of up to 128 characters. The title is displayed in the mask test dialog box and mask test tab when a mask file is loaded. Return Format
::= a string of up to 128 ASCII characters.5 Commands by Subsystem :POD Commands Control all oscilloscope functions associated with groups of digital channels. See "Introduction to :POD Commands" on page 404.
5 Commands by Subsystem :POD:DISPlay (see page 798) Command Syntax :POD:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} ::= An integer, 1 or 2, is attached as a suffix to the command and defines the group of channels that are affected by the command. POD1 ::= D0-D7 POD2 ::= D8-D15 The :POD:DISPlay command turns displaying of the specified group of channels on or off. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid for the MSO models.
5 Commands by Subsystem :POD:SIZE (see page 798) Command Syntax :POD:SIZE ::= An integer, 1 or 2, is attached as a suffix to the command and defines the group of channels that are affected by the command. POD1 ::= D0-D7 POD2 ::= D8-D15 ::= {SMALl | MEDium | LARGe} The :POD:SIZE command specifies the size of digital channels on the display. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid for the MSO models.
5 Commands by Subsystem :POD:THReshold (see page 798) Command Syntax :POD:THReshold [] ::= An integer, 1 or 2, is attached as a suffix to the command and defines the group of channels that are affected by the command. ::= {CMOS | ECL | TTL | } ::= -8.00 to +8.00 in NR3 format ::= {V | mV | uV} POD1 ::= D0-D7 POD2 ::= D8-D15 TTL ::= 1.4V CMOS ::= 2.5V ECL ::= -1.
5 Commands by Subsystem ' Set channels 0-7 to CMOS threshold. myScope.WriteString ":POD1:THRESHOLD CMOS" ' Set channels 8-15 to 2.0 volts. myScope.WriteString ":POD2:THRESHOLD 2.0" ' Set external channel to TTL threshold (short form). myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :RECall Commands Recall previously saved oscilloscope setups and traces. See "Introduction to :RECall Commands" on page 409.
5 Commands by Subsystem :RECall:FILename (see page 798) Command Syntax :RECall:FILename ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:FILename command specifies the source for any RECall operations. NOTE Query Syntax This command specifies a file's base name only, without path information or an extension. :RECall:FILename? The :RECall:FILename? query returns the current RECall filename.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :RECall:IMAGe[:STARt] (see page 798) Command Syntax :RECall:IMAGe[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:IMAGe[:STARt] command recalls a trace (TIFF) image. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".tif".
5 Commands by Subsystem :RECall:MASK[:STARt] (see page 798) Command Syntax :RECall:MASK[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-3; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:MASK[:STARt] command recalls a mask. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".msk".
5 Commands by Subsystem :RECall:PWD (see page 798) Command Syntax :RECall:PWD ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:PWD command sets the present working directory for recall operations. Query Syntax :RECall:PWD? The :RECall:PWD? query returns the currently set working directory for recall operations.
5 Commands by Subsystem :RECall:SETup[:STARt] (see page 798) Command Syntax :RECall:SETup[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:SETup[:STARt] command recalls an oscilloscope setup. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".scp".
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE Commands Save oscilloscope setups and traces, screen images, and data. See "Introduction to :SAVE Commands" on page 416.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 73 :SAVE Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] [] (see page 427) n/a ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt ] [] (see page 428) n/a ::= quoted ASCII string :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat (see page 429) :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat ? (see page 429) ::= {ALB | ASCiixy
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:FILename (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:FILename ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:FILename command specifies the source for any SAVE operations. NOTE Query Syntax This command specifies a file's base name only, without path information or an extension. :SAVE:FILename? The :SAVE:FILename? query returns the current SAVE filename.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt] (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt] command saves an image.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:IMAGe:AREA (see page 798) Query Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:AREA? The :SAVE:IMAGe:AREA? query returns the selected image area. If the :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat is TIFF, the area is GRAT (graticule). Otherwise, it is SCR (screen).
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The :SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors command controls whether the oscilloscope factors are output along with the image. NOTE Query Syntax Factors are written to a separate file with the same path and base name but with the ".txt" extension.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat ::= {TIFF | {BMP | BMP24bit} | BMP8bit | PNG} The :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat command sets the image format type. Query Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat? The :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat? query returns the selected image format type. Return Format ::= {TIFF | BMP | BMP8 | PNG | NONE} When NONE is returned, it indicates that a waveform data file format is currently selected.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver command controls whether the graticule colors are inverted or not. Query Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver? The :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver? query returns a flag indicating whether graticule colors are inverted or not.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette ::= {COLor | GRAYscale | MONochrome} The :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette command sets the image palette color. NOTE Query Syntax MONochrome is the only valid choice when the :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat is TIFF. COLor and GRAYscale are the only valid choices when the format is not TIFF. :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette? The :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette? query returns the selected image palette color.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:LISTer[:STARt] (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:LISTer[:STARt] [] ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:LISTer[:STARt] command saves the Lister display data to a file. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".csv".
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:MASK[:STARt] (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:MASK[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-3; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:MASK[:STARt] command saves a mask. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".msk".
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:PWD (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:PWD ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:PWD command sets the present working directory for save operations. Query Syntax :SAVE:PWD? The :SAVE:PWD? query returns the currently set working directory for save operations.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] command saves an oscilloscope setup. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".scp".
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt] (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt] [] ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt] command saves oscilloscope waveform data to a file. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , and it does not match the extension expected by the format specified in :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat, the format will be changed if the extension is a valid waveform file extension.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat ::= {ALB | ASCiixy | CSV | BINary} The :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat command sets the waveform data format type: • ALB — creates an Agilent module binary format file. These files can be viewed offline by the Agilent Logic Analyzer application software. The proper file extension for this format is ".alb".
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth ::= 100 to max. length; an integer in NR1 format The :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth command sets the waveform data length (that is, the number of points saved). Query Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth? The :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth? query returns the specified waveform data length. Return Format ::= 100 to max.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:WAVeform:SEGMented (see page 798) Command Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform:SEGMented
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS Commands Control oscilloscope functions associated with the serial decode bus. See "Introduction to :SBUS Commands" on page 433.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 74 :SBUS Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :SBUS:SPI:BITorder (see page 449) :SBUS:SPI:BITorder? (see page 449) ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh (see page 450) :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh? (see page 450) ::= integer 4-16 in NR1 format :SBUS:UART:BASE (see page 451) :SBUS:UART:BASE? (see page 451) ::= {ASCii | BINary | HEX} n/a :SBUS:UART:COUNt:ERRo r? (see page 452)
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:ERRor (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:ERRor? Returns the error frame count.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:OVERload (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:OVERload? Returns the overload frame count.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:RESet (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:RESet Resets the frame counters.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:TOTal (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:TOTal? Returns the total frame count.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:UTILization (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:UTILization? Returns the percent utilization.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:DISPlay (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SBUS:DISPlay command turns displaying of the serial decode bus on or off. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when a serial decode option has been licensed. :SBUS:DISPlay? The :SBUS:DISPlay? query returns the current display setting of the serial decode bus.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:NULL (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:NULL? Returns the FlexRay null frame count.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:RESet (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:RESet Resets the FlexRay frame counters.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:SYNC (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:SYNC? Returns the FlexRay sync frame count.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:TOTal (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:TOTal? Returns the FlexRay total frame count.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:I2S:BASE (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:I2S:BASE ::= {DECimal | HEX} The :SBUS:I2S:BASE command determines the base to use for the I2S decode display. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the I2S serial decode option (Option SND) has been licensed. :SBUS:I2S:BASE? The :SBUS:I2S:BASE? query returns the current I2S display decode base.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:IIC:ASIZe (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:IIC:ASIZe ::= {BIT7 | BIT8} The :SBUS:IIC:ASIZe command determines whether the Read/Write bit is included as the LSB in the display of the IIC address field of the decode bus. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the low-speed IIC and SPI serial decode option (Option LSS) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:LIN:PARity (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:LIN:PARity ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SBUS:LIN:PARity command determines whether the parity bits are included as the most significant bits (MSB) in the display of the Frame Id field in the LIN decode bus. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the automotive CAN and LIN serial decode option (Option AMS) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:M1553:BASE (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:M1553:BASE ::= {BINary | HEX} The :SBUS:M1553:BASE command determines the base to use for the MIL- STD 1553 decode display. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the MIL-STD 1553 serial decode option (Option 553) has been licensed. :SBUS:M1553:BASE? The :SBUS:M1553:BASE? query returns the current MIL- STD 1553 display decode base.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:MODE (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:MODE ::= {CAN | FLEXray | I2S | IIC | LIN | M1553 | SPI | UART} The :SBUS:MODE command determines the decode mode for the serial bus. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when a serial decode option has been licensed. :SBUS:MODE? The :SBUS:MODE? query returns the current serial bus decode mode setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:SPI:BITorder (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:SPI:BITorder ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} The :SBUS:SPI:BITorder command selects the bit order, most significant bit first (MSB) or least significant bit first (LSB), used when displaying data in the serial decode waveform and in the Lister. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the low-speed IIC and SPI serial decode option (Option LSS) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh ::= integer 4-16 in NR1 format The :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh command determines the number of bits in a word of data for SPI. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the low-speed IIC and SPI serial decode option (Option LSS) has been licensed. :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh? The :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh? query returns the current SPI decode word width.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:UART:BASE (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:UART:BASE ::= {ASCii | BINary | HEX} The :SBUS:UART:BASE command determines the base to use for the UART decode display. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed. :SBUS:UART:BASE? The :SBUS:UART:BASE? query returns the current UART decode base setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:UART:COUNt:ERRor (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:UART:COUNt:ERRor? Returns the UART error frame count. NOTE Return Format This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RESet (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RESet Resets the UART frame counters. NOTE Errors See Also This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RXFRames (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RXFRames? Returns the UART Rx frame count. NOTE Return Format This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFRames (see page 798) Query Syntax :SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFRames? Returns the UART Tx frame count. NOTE Return Format This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:UART:FRAMing (see page 798) Command Syntax :SBUS:UART:FRAMing ::= {OFF | | } ::= 8-bit integer in decimal from 0-255 (0x00-0xff) ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary The :SBUS:UART:FRAMing command determines the byte value to use for framing (end of packet) or to turn off framing for UART decode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem Commands Control basic system functions of the oscilloscope. See "Introduction to :SYSTem Commands" on page 457. Table 75 :SYSTem Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :SYSTem:DATE (see page 458) :SYSTem:DATE? (see page 458) ::= ,, ::= 4-digit year in NR1 format ::= {1,..,12 | JANuary | FEBruary | MARch | APRil | MAY | JUNe | JULy | AUGust | SEPtember | OCTober | NOVember | DECember} ::= {1,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:DATE (see page 798) Command Syntax :SYSTem:DATE ::= ,, ::= 4-digit year in NR1 format ::= {1,..,12 | JANuary | FEBruary | MARch | APRil | MAY | JUNe | JULy | AUGust | SEPtember | OCTober | NOVember | DECember} ::= {1,..,31} The :SYSTem:DATE command sets the date. Validity checking is performed to ensure that the date is valid. Query Syntax :SYSTem:DATE? The SYSTem:DATE? query returns the date.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SYSTem:DSP (see page 798) Command Syntax :SYSTem:DSP ::= quoted ASCII string (up to 254 characters) The :SYSTem:DSP command writes the quoted string (excluding quotation marks) to a text box in the center of the display. Use :SYStem:DSP "" to remotely remove the message from the display. (Two sets of quote marks without a space between them creates a NULL string.) Press any menu key to manually remove the message from the display.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:ERRor (see page 798) Query Syntax :SYSTem:ERRor? The :SYSTem:ERRor? query outputs the next error number and text from the error queue. The instrument has an error queue that is 30 errors deep and operates on a first- in, first- out basis. Repeatedly sending the :SYSTem:ERRor? query returns the errors in the order that they occurred until the queue is empty. Any further queries then return zero until another error occurs.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SYSTem:LOCK (see page 798) Command Syntax :SYSTem:LOCK ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SYSTem:LOCK command disables the front panel. LOCK ON is the equivalent of sending a local lockout message over the programming interface. Query Syntax :SYSTem:LOCK? The :SYSTem:LOCK? query returns the lock status of the front panel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:PRECision (see page 798) Command Syntax :SYSTem:PRECision ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SYSTem:PRECision command turns the oscilloscope's precision analysis setting on or off. • OFF (0) — provides the maximum oscilloscope waveform update rate by performing measurements and math functions on a 1000- point measurement record.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK (see page 798) Command Syntax :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK command disables the fifty ohm impedance setting for all analog channels. Query Syntax :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK? The :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK? query returns the analog channel protection lock status.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:SETup (see page 798) Command Syntax :SYSTem:SETup ::= binary block data in IEEE 488.2 # format. The :SYSTem:SETup command sets the oscilloscope as defined by the data in the setup (learn) string sent from the controller. The setup string does not change the interface mode or interface address. Query Syntax :SYSTem:SETup? The :SYSTem:SETup? query operates the same as the *LRN? query.
Commands by Subsystem 5 ' Write setup string back to oscilloscope using ":SYSTEM:SETUP" ' command: myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:TIME (see page 798) Command Syntax :SYSTem:TIME ::= hours,minutes,seconds in NR1 format The :SYSTem:TIME command sets the system time, using a 24- hour format. Commas are used as separators. Validity checking is performed to ensure that the time is valid. Query Syntax :SYSTem:TIME? The :SYSTem:TIME? query returns the current system time.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase Commands Control all horizontal sweep functions. See "Introduction to :TIMebase Commands" on page 468.
5 Commands by Subsystem Introduction to :TIMebase Commands The TIMebase subsystem commands control the horizontal (X- axis) functions and set the oscilloscope to X- Y mode (where channel 1 becomes the X input and channel 2 becomes the Y input). The time per division, delay, vernier control, and reference can be controlled for the main and window (zoomed) time bases. Reporting the Setup Use :TIMebase? to query setup information for the TIMebase subsystem.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TIMebase:MODE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:MODE ::= {MAIN | WINDow | XY | ROLL} The :TIMebase:MODE command sets the current time base. There are four time base modes: • MAIN — The normal time base mode is the main time base. It is the default time base mode after the *RST (Reset) command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:POSition (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:POSition ::= time in seconds from the trigger to the display reference in NR3 format The :TIMebase:POSition command sets the time interval between the trigger event and the display reference point on the screen. The display reference point is either left, right, or center and is set with the :TIMebase:REFerence command. The maximum position value depends on the time/division settings.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:RANGe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:RANGe ::= 5 ns through 500 s in NR3 format The :TIMebase:RANGe command sets the full- scale horizontal time in seconds for the main window. The range is 10 times the current time- per- division setting. Query Syntax :TIMebase:RANGe? The :TIMebase:RANGe query returns the current full- scale range value for the main window.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:REFClock (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:REFClock ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF} The :TIMebase:REFClock command enables or disables the 10 MHz REF BNC located on the rear panel of the oscilloscope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TIMebase:REFerence (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:REFerence ::= {LEFT | CENTer | RIGHt} The :TIMebase:REFerence command sets the time reference to one division from the left side of the screen, to the center of the screen, or to one division from the right side of the screen. Time reference is the point on the display where the trigger point is referenced.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:SCALe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:SCALe ::= 500 ps through 50 s in NR3 format The :TIMebase:SCALe command sets the horizontal scale or units per division for the main window. Query Syntax :TIMebase:SCALe? The :TIMebase:SCALe? query returns the current horizontal scale setting in seconds per division for the main window.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:VERNier (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:VERNier ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF} The :TIMebase:VERNier command specifies whether the time base control's vernier (fine horizontal adjustment) setting is ON (1) or OFF (0). Query Syntax :TIMebase:VERNier? The :TIMebase:VERNier? query returns the current state of the time base control's vernier setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:WINDow:POSition (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:WINDow:POSition ::= time from the trigger event to the zoomed (delayed) view reference point in NR3 format The :TIMebase:WINDow:POSition command sets the horizontal position in the zoomed (delayed) view of the main sweep. The main sweep range and the main sweep horizontal position determine the range for this command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe ::= range value in seconds in NR3 format The :TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe command sets the full- scale horizontal time in seconds for the zoomed (delayed) window. The range is 10 times the current zoomed view window seconds per division setting. The main sweep range determines the range for this command. The maximum value is one half of the :TIMebase:RANGe value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe ::= scale value in seconds in NR3 format The :TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe command sets the zoomed (delayed) window horizontal scale (seconds/division). The main sweep scale determines the range for this command. The maximum value is one half of the :TIMebase:SCALe value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger Commands Control the trigger modes and parameters for each trigger type.
5 Commands by Subsystem The following trigger types are available (see ":TRIGger:MODE" on page 485). • CAN (Controller Area Network) triggering— will trigger on CAN version 2.0A and 2.0B signals. Setup consists of connecting the oscilloscope to a CAN signal. Baud rate, signal source, and signal polarity, and type of data to trigger on can be specified.
5 Commands by Subsystem • Sequence triggering— allows you to trigger the oscilloscope after finding a sequence of events. Defining a sequence trigger requires three steps: a Define the event to find before you trigger on the next event. This event can be a pattern, and edge from a single channel, or the combination of a pattern and a channel edge. b Define the trigger event.
5 Commands by Subsystem General :TRIGger Commands Table 77 General :TRIGger Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:HFReject {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 483) :TRIGger:HFReject? (see page 483) {0 | 1} :TRIGger:HOLDoff (see page 484) :TRIGger:HOLDoff? (see page 484) ::= 60 ns to 10 s in NR3 format :TRIGger:MODE (see page 485) :TRIGger:MODE? (see page 485) ::= {EDGE | GLITch | PATTern | CAN | DURation | I2S |IIC | EBURst |
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:HFReject (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:HFReject ::= {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} The :TRIGger:HFReject command turns the high frequency reject filter off and on. The high frequency reject filter adds a 50 kHz low- pass filter in the trigger path to remove high frequency components from the trigger waveform. Use this filter to remove high- frequency noise, such as AM or FM broadcast stations, from the trigger path.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:HOLDoff (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:HOLDoff ::= 60 ns to 10 s in NR3 format The :TRIGger:HOLDoff command defines the holdoff time value in seconds. Holdoff keeps a trigger from occurring until after a certain amount of time has passed since the last trigger. This feature is valuable when a waveform crosses the trigger level multiple times during one period of the waveform.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:MODE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:MODE ::= {EDGE | GLITch | PATTern | CAN | DURation | I2S |IIC | EBURst | LIN | M1553| SEQuence | SPI | TV | UART | USB | FLEXray} The :TRIGger:MODE command selects the trigger mode (trigger type). Query Syntax :TRIGger:MODE? The :TRIGger:MODE? query returns the current trigger mode. If the :TIMebase:MODE is ROLL or XY, the query returns "NONE".
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:NREJect (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:NREJect ::= {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} The :TRIGger:NREJect command turns the noise reject filter off and on. When the noise reject filter is on, the trigger circuitry is less sensitive to noise but may require a greater amplitude waveform to trigger the oscilloscope. This command is not valid in TV trigger mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:PATTern (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:PATTern ::= , [, , ] ::= integer in NR1 format or ::= integer in NR1 format or ::= "0xnnnnn"; n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} (# bits = # channels, see following table) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal | NONE} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Query Syntax :TRIGger:PATTern? The :TRIGger:PATTern? query returns the pattern value, the mask, and the edge of interest in the simple pattern.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SWEep (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SWEep ::= {AUTO | NORMal} The :TRIGger:SWEep command selects the trigger sweep mode. When AUTO sweep mode is selected, a baseline is displayed in the absence of a signal. If a signal is present but the oscilloscope is not triggered, the unsynchronized signal is displayed instead of a baseline.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN Commands Table 78 :TRIGger:CAN Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern: DATA , (see page 492) :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern: DATA? (see page 492) ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or (with Option AMS) ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 78 :TRIGger:CAN Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce (see page 498) :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce? (see page 498) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA , ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth ::= integer from 1 to 8 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth command sets the number of 8- bit bytes in the CAN data string. The number of bytes in the string can be anywhere from 0 bytes to 8 bytes (64 bits). The value for these bytes is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID , ::= 32-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= 32-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID:MODE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID:MODE ::= {STANdard | EXTended} The :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID:MODE command sets the CAN identifier mode. STANdard selects the standard 11- bit identifier. EXTended selects the extended 29- bit identifier. The CAN identifier is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:SAMPlepoint (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:SAMPlepoint ::= {60 | 62.5 | 68 | 70 | 75 | 80 | 87.5} in NR3 format The :TRIGger:CAN:SAMPlepoint command sets the point during the bit time where the bit level is sampled to determine whether the bit is dominant or recessive. The sample point represents the percentage of time between the beginning of the bit time to the end of the bit time.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate ::= integer from 10000 to 1000000 in 100 b/s increments The :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate command sets the standard baud rate of the CAN signal from 10 kb/s to 1 Mb/s in 100 b/s increments. If you enter a baud rate that is not divisible by 100 b/s, the baud rate is set to the nearest baud rate divisible by 100 b/s.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce command sets the source for the CAN signal. The source setting is only valid when :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger is set to SOF (start of frame).
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger ::= {SOF | DATA | ERRor | IDData | IDEither | IDRemote | ALLerrors | OVERload | ACKerror} The :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger command sets the CAN trigger on condition: • SOF - will trigger on the Start of Frame (SOF) bit of a Data frame, Remote Transfer Request (RTR) frame, or an Overload frame.
5 Commands by Subsystem CAN Id specification is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID and:TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID:MODE commands. CAN Data specification is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA command. CAN Data Length Code is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth command. NOTE Query Syntax SOF is the only valid selection for analog oscilloscopes. If the automotive CAN and LIN serial decode option (Option AMS) has not been licensed, SOF is the only valid selection.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:DURation Commands Table 79 :TRIGger:DURation Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:DURation:GRE aterthan [suffix] (see page 502) :TRIGger:DURation:GRE aterthan? (see page 502) ::= floating-point number in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} :TRIGger:DURation:LES Sthan [suffix] (see page 503) :TRIGger:DURation:LES Sthan? (see page 503) ::= floating-point n
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan [] ::= minimum trigger duration in seconds in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps } The :TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan command sets the minimum duration for the defined pattern when :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier is set to GREaterthan. The command also sets the timeout value when the :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier is set to TIMeout.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan [] ::= maximum trigger duration in seconds in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan command sets the maximum duration for the defined pattern when :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier is set to LESSthan.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:DURation:PATTern (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:PATTern , ::= integer or ::= integer or ::= "0xnnnnnn"; n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:DURation:PATTern command defines the specified duration pattern resource according to the value and the mask. For both and , each bit corresponds to a possible trigger channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier ::= {GREaterthan | LESSthan | INRange | OUTRange | TIMeout} The :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier command qualifies the trigger duration. Set the GREaterthan qualifier value with the :TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan command. Set the LESSthan qualifier value with the :TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:DURation:RANGe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:RANGe [], [] ::= 10 ns to 9.99 seconds in NR3 format ::= 15 ns to 10 seconds in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:DURation:RANGe command sets the duration for the defined pattern when the :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier command is set to INRange or OUTRange.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:EBURst Commands Table 80 :TRIGger:EBURst Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt (see page 508) :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt ? (see page 508) ::= integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE (see page 509) :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE? (see page 509) ::= time in seconds in NR3 format :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe (see page 510) :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe ? (see page 510) ::= {NEGative | POSitive}
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt ::= integer in NR1 format The :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt command sets the Nth edge at burst counter resource. The edge counter is used in the trigger stage to determine which edge in a burst will generate a trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt? The :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt? query returns the current Nth edge of burst edge counter setting.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE ::= time in seconds in NR3 format The :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE command sets the Nth edge in a burst idle resource in seconds from 10 ns to 10 s. The timer is used to set the minimum time before the next burst. Query Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE? The :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE? query returns current Nth edge in a burst idle setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe ::= {NEGative | POSitive} The :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe command specifies whether the rising edge (POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative) of the Nth edge in a burst will generate a trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe? The :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe? query returns the current Nth edge in a burst slope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE] Commands Table 81 :TRIGger[:EDGE] Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPl ing {AC | DC | LF} (see page 512) :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPl ing? (see page 512) {AC | DC | LF} :TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel [,] (see page 513) :TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel ? [] (see page 513) For internal triggers, ::= .75 x full-scale voltage from center screen in NR3 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPling (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPling ::= {AC | DC | LFReject} The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPling command sets the input coupling for the selected trigger sources. The coupling can be set to AC, DC, or LFReject. • AC coupling places a high- pass filter (10 Hz for analog channels, and 3.5 Hz for all External trigger inputs) in the trigger path, removing dc offset voltage from the trigger waveform.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel ::= [,] ::= 0.75 x full-scale voltage from center screen in NR3 format for internal triggers ::= ±(external range setting) in NR3 format for external triggers ::= ±8 V for digital channels (MSO models) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect ::= {OFF | LFReject | HFReject} The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect command turns the low- frequency or high- frequency reject filter on or off. You can turn on one of these filters at a time. • The high frequency reject filter adds a 50 kHz low- pass filter in the trigger path to remove high frequency components from the trigger waveform.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe ::= {NEGative | POSitive | EITHer | ALTernate} The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe command specifies the slope of the edge for the trigger. The SLOPe command is not valid in TV trigger mode. Instead, use :TRIGger:TV:POLarity to set the polarity in TV trigger mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe? The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe? query returns the current trigger slope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal | LINE} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15 | EXTernal | LINE} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce command selects the channel that produces the trigger.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray Commands Table 82 :TRIGger:FLEXray Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTo setup (see page 518) n/a n/a :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUD rate (see page 519) :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUD rate? (see page 519) ::= {2500000 | 5000000 | 10000000} :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHAN nel (see page 520) :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHAN nel? (see page 520) ::= {A | B} :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRo r:TYPE (see page 521)
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTosetup (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTosetup The :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTosetup command automatically configures oscilloscope settings to facilitate FlexRay triggering and serial decode. • Sets the selected source channel's impedance to 50 Ohms. • Sets the selected source channel’s probe attenuation to 10:1. • Sets the trigger level (on the selected source channel) to - 300 mV. • Turns on trigger Noise Reject. • Turns on Serial Decode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate ::= {2500000 | 5000000 | 10000000} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate command specifies the baud rate as 2.5 Mb/s, 5 Mb/s, or 10 Mb/s. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the FlexRay triggering and serial decode option (Option FLX) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel ::= {A | B} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel command specifies the bus channel, A or B, of the FlexRay signal. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the FlexRay triggering and serial decode option (Option FLX) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRor:TYPE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRor:TYPE ::= {ALL | HCRC | FCRC} Selects the FlexRay error type to trigger on. The error type setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to ERRor. • ALL — triggers on ALL errors. • HCRC — triggers on only Header CRC errors. • FCRC — triggers on only Frame CRC errors.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:EVENt:TYPE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:EVENt:TYPE ::= {WAKeup | TSS | {FES | DTS} | BSS} Selects the FlexRay event to trigger on. The event setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to EVENt. • WAKeup — triggers on Wake- Up event. • TSS — triggers on Transmission Start Sequence event. • FES — triggers on Frame End Sequence event. • DTS — triggers on Dynamic Trailing Sequence event.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCBase (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCBase ::= integer from 0-63 The :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCBase command sets the base of the FlexRay cycle count (in the frame header) to trigger on. The cycle count base setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to FRAME.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCRepetition (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCRepetition ::= {ALL | } ::= integer from 2-64 The :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCRepetition command sets the repetition number of the FlexRay cycle count (in the frame header) to trigger on. The cycle count repetition setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to FRAME.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:ID (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:ID ::= {ALL | } ::= integer from 1-2047 The :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:ID command sets the FlexRay frame ID to trigger on . The frame IF setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to FRAME. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid when the FLEXray triggering and serial decode option (Option FLX) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:TYPE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:TYPE ::= {NORMal | STARtup | NULL | SYNC | NSTArtup | NNULl | NSYNc | ALL} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:TYPE command sets the FlexRay frame type to trigger on. The frame type setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to FRAME. • NORMal — will trigger on only normal (NSTArtup & NNULl & NSYNc) frames. • STARtup — will trigger on only startup frames.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce ::= {CHANnel} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce command specifies the input source for the FlexRay signal. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid when the FLEXray triggering and serial decode option (Option FLX) has been licensed. :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce? The :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce? query returns the current source for the FlexRay signal.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger ::= {FRAMe | ERRor | EVENt} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger command sets the FLEXray trigger on condition: • FRAMe — triggers on specified frames (without errors). • ERRor — triggers on selected active error frames and unknown bus conditions. • EVENt — triggers on specified FlexRay event/symbol.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch Commands Table 83 :TRIGger:GLITch Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:GLITch:GREat erthan [s uffix] (see page 531) :TRIGger:GLITch:GREat erthan? (see page 531) ::= floating-point number in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSt han [suff ix] (see page 532) :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSt han? (see page 532) ::= floating-point number in N
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 83 :TRIGger:GLITch Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe [suff ix], [s uffix] (see page 536) :TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe ? (see page 536) ::= 15 ns to 10 seconds in NR3 format ::= 10 ns to 9.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:GLITch:GREaterthan (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:GREaterthan [] ::= floating-point number in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:GLITch:GREaterthan command sets the minimum pulse width duration for the selected :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan [] ::= floating-point number in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan command sets the maximum pulse width duration for the selected :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce. Query Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan? The :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan? query returns the pulse width duration time for :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:LEVel (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:LEVel ::= [, ] ::= .75 x full-scale voltage from center screen in NR3 format for internal triggers ::= ±(external range setting) in NR3 format for external triggers (DSO models) ::= ±8 V for digital channels (MSO models) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity ::= {POSitive | NEGative} The :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity command sets the polarity for the glitch pulse width trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity? The :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity? query returns the glitch pulse width trigger polarity.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier ::= {GREaterthan | LESSthan | RANGe} This command sets the mode of operation of the glitch pulse width trigger. The oscilloscope can trigger on a pulse width that is greater than a time value, less than a time value, or within a range of time values. Query Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier? The :TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier? query returns the glitch pulse width qualifier.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe [suffix], [suffix] ::= (15 ns - 10 seconds) in NR3 format ::= (10 ns - 9.99 seconds) in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe command sets the pulse width duration for the selected :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {DIGital0,..,DIGital15 | CHANnel} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce command selects the channel that produces the pulse width trigger.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S Commands Table 84 :TRIGger:I2S Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnmen t (see page 540) :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnmen t? (see page 540) ::= {I2S | LJ | RJ} :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio (see page 541) :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio? (see page 541) ::= {RIGHt | LEFT | EITHer} :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SL OPe (see page 542) :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SL OPe? (see page 542) ::= {NEGative | POSitive} :TRIGger:I
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 84 :TRIGger:I2S Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:C LOCk (see page 549) :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:C LOCk? (see page 549) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnment (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnment ::= {I2S | LJ | RJ} The :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnment command selects the data alignment of the I2S bus for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in I2S mode: • I2S — standard. • LJ — left justified. • RJ — right justified. Note that the word select (WS) polarity is specified separately with the :TRIGger:I2S:WSHigh command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio ::= {RIGHt | LEFT | EITHer} The :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio command specifies the audio channel to trigger on: • RIGHt — right channel. • LEFT— left channel. • EITHer — right channel. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio? The :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio? query returns the current audio channel for the I2S trigger.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe ::= {NEGative | POSitive} The :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe command specifies which edge of the I2S serial clock signal clocks in data. • NEGative — Falling edge. • POSitive — Rising edge. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe? The :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe? query returns the current I2S clock slope setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA ::= "n" where n ::= 32-bit integer in signed decimal when = DECimal ::= "nn...n" where n ::= {0 | 1 | X | $} when = BINary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F | X | $} when = HEX NOTE is specified with the :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat command. The default is DECimal.
5 Commands by Subsystem NOTE Query Syntax If more bits are sent for than the specified trigger data length, the most significant bits will be truncated. If the word size is changed after the is programmed, the added or deleted bits will be added to or deleted from the least significant bits. :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA? The :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA? query returns the currently specified I2S trigger data pattern.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat ::= {BINary | HEX | DECimal} The :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat command sets the entry (and query) number base used by the :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA command. The default is DECimal. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat? The :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat? query returns the currently set number base for I2S pattern data.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:RANGe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:RANGe , ::= 32-bit integer in signed decimal, , or ::= 32-bit integer in signed decimal, or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
Commands by Subsystem 5 • ":TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger" on page 552 • ":TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth" on page 548 • ":TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth" on page 554 • ":TRIGger:I2S:WSLow" on page 555 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 547
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth ::= 4-32 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth command sets the width of the receiver (decoded) data word in I2S anywhere from 4 bits to 32 bits. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth? The :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth? query returns the currently set I2S receiver data word width.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:CLOCk (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:CLOCk ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:DATA ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:WSELect (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:WSELect ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger ::= {EQUal | NOTequal | LESSthan | GREaterthan | INRange | OUTRange | INCReasing | DECReasing} The :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger command sets the I2S trigger operator: • EQUal— triggers on the specified audio channel's data word when it equals the specified word. • NOTequal — triggers on any word other than the specified word.
5 Commands by Subsystem The :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger? query returns the current I2S trigger operator.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth ::= 4-32 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth command sets the width of the transmitted data word in I2S anywhere from 4 bits to 32 bits. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth? The :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth? query returns the currently set I2S transmitted data word width.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:WSLow (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:WSLow ::= {LEFT | RIGHt} The :TRIGger:I2S:WSLow command selects the polarity of the word select (WS) signal: • LEFT— a word select (WS) state of low indicates left channel data is active on the I2S bus, and a WS state of high indicates right channel data is active on the bus.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC Commands Table 85 :TRIGger:IIC Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern: ADDRess (see page 557) :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern: ADDRess? (see page 557) ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern: DATA (see page 558) :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern: DATA? (see page 558) ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess command sets the address for IIC data.The address can range from 0x00 to 0x7F (7- bit) or 0x3FF (10- bit) hexadecimal. Use the don't care address (- 1 or 0xFFFFFFFF) to ignore the address value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA command sets IIC data. The data value can range from 0x00 to 0x0FF (hexadecimal). Use the don't care data pattern (- 1 or 0xFFFFFFFF) to ignore the data value. Query Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA? The :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA? query returns the current pattern for IIC data.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2 (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2 ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2 command sets IIC data 2. The data value can range from 0x00 to 0x0FF (hexadecimal). Use the don't care data pattern (- 1 or 0xFFFFFFFF) to ignore the data value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:CLOCk (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]CLOCk ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]CLOCk command sets the source for the IIC serial clock (SCL).
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]DATA ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]DATA command sets the source for IIC serial data (SDA).
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier ::= {EQUal | NOTequal | LESSthan | GREaterthan} The :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier command sets the IIC data qualifier when TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE] is set to READEprom. Query Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier? The :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier? query returns the current IIC data qualifier value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE] (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE] ::= {STARt | STOP | READ7 | READEprom | WRITe7 | WRITe10 | NACKnowledge | ANACknowledge | R7Data2 | W7Data2 | RESTart} The :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE] command sets the IIC trigger type: • STARt — Start condition. • STOP — Stop condition. • READ7 — 7- bit address frame containing (Start:Address7:Read:Ack:Data). The value READ is also accepted for READ7.
5 Commands by Subsystem • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess" on page 557 • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA" on page 558 • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2" on page 559 • ":TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier" on page 562 • "Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules" on page 800 564 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN Commands Table 86 :TRIGger:LIN Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:LIN:ID (see page 567) :TRIGger:LIN:ID? (see page 567) ::= 7-bit integer in decimal, , or from 0-63 or 0x00-0x3f (with Option AMS) ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 86 :TRIGger:LIN Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbrea k (see page 576) :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbrea k? (see page 576) ::= integer = {11 | 12 | 13} :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger (see page 577) :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger? (see page 577) ::= {SYNCbreak} (without Option AMS) ::= {SYNCbreak | ID | DATA} (with Option AMS) 566 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guid
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:ID (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:ID ::= 7-bit integer in decimal, , or from 0-63 or 0x00-0x3f ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal The :TRIGger:LIN:ID command defines the LIN identifier searched for in each CAN message when the LIN trigger mode is set to frame ID.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA ::= "n" where n ::= 32-bit integer in signed decimal when = DECimal ::= "nn...n" where n ::= {0 | 1 | X | $} when = BINary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F | X | $} when = HEX NOTE is specified with the :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat command. The default is DECimal.
Commands by Subsystem Query Syntax 5 :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA? The :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA? query returns the currently specified LIN trigger data pattern.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth ::= integer from 1 to 8 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth command sets the number of 8- bit bytes in the LIN data string. The number of bytes in the string can be anywhere from 0 bytes to 8 bytes (64 bits). The value for these bytes is set by the :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat ::= {BINary | HEX | DECimal} The :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat command sets the entry (and query) number base used by the :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA command. The default is DECimal. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid when the automotive CAN and LIN serial decode option (Option AMS) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint ::= {60 | 62.5 | 68 | 70 | 75 | 80 | 87.5} in NR3 format The :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint command sets the point during the bit time where the bit level is sampled to determine whether the bit is dominant or recessive. The sample point represents the percentage of time between the beginning of the bit time to the end of the bit time.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate ::= integer from 2400 to 625000 in 100 b/s increments The :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate command sets the standard baud rate of the LIN signal from 2400 b/s to 625 kb/s in 100 b/s increments. If you enter a baud rate that is not divisible by 100 b/s, the baud rate is set to the nearest baud rate divisible by 100 b/s.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce command sets the source for the LIN signal.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard ::= {LIN13 | LIN20} The :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard command sets the LIN standard in effect for triggering and decoding to be LIN1.3 or LIN2.0. Query Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard? The :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard? query returns the current LIN standard setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbreak (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbreak ::= integer = {11 | 12 | 13} The :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbreak command sets the length of the LIN sync break to be greater than or equal to 11, 12, or 13 clock lengths. The sync break is the idle period in the bus activity at the beginning of each packet that distinguishes one information packet from the previous one.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger ::= {SYNCbreak | ID | DATA} The :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger command sets the LIN trigger condition to be: • SYNCbreak — Sync Break. • ID — Frame ID. Use the :TRIGger:LIN:ID command to specify the frame ID. • DATA — Frame ID and Data. Use the :TRIGger:LIN:ID command to specify the frame ID.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:M1553 Commands Table 87 :TRIGger:M1553 Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:M1553:AUTose tup (see page 579) n/a n/a :TRIGger:M1553:PATTer n:DATA (see page 580) :TRIGger:M1553:PATTer n:DATA? (see page 580) ::= "nn...
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:M1553:AUTosetup (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:AUTosetup The :TRIGger:M1553:AUTosetup command copies the position, volts/div, and probe attenuation from the upper threshold channel to the lower threshold channel, sets the upper/lower trigger levels to +/- 500 mV, turns on serial decode, and sets the trigger mode to M1553.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA ::= "nn...n" where n ::= {0 | 1 | X} The :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA command sets the 11 bits to trigger on if the trigger type has been set to RTA11 (RTA + 11 Bits) using the :TRIG:M1553:TYPE command. Query Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA? The :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA? query returns the current 11- bit setting. Return Format ::= "nn...
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:M1553:RTA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:RTA ::= 5-bit integer in decimal, , or from 0-31 ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9|A,..,F} ::= "0xnn" where n::= {0,..,9|A,..,F} The :TRIGger:M1553:RTA command sets the Remote Terminal Address (RTA) to trigger on if the trigger type has been set to RTA using the :TRIG:M1553:TYPE command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer ::= {CHANnel} ::= {2 | 4} The :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer command controls which signal is used as the Lower Threshold Channel source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in MIL- 1553 mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer? The :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer? query returns the currently set Lower Threshold Channel source.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer ::= {CHANnel} ::= {1 | 3} The :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer command controls which signal is used as the Upper Threshold Channel source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in MIL- 1553 mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer? The :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer? query returns the currently set Upper Threshold Channel source.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:M1553:TYPE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:TYPE ::= {DSTArt | DSTOp | CSTArt | CSTOp | RTA | PERRor | SERRor | MERRor | RTA11} The :TRIGger:M1553:TYPE command specifies the type of MIL- STD 1553 trigger to be used: • DSTArt — (Data Word Start) triggers on the start of a Data word (at the end of a valid Data Sync pulse). • DSTOp — (Data Word Stop) triggers on the end of a Data word.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence Commands Table 88 :TRIGger:SEQuence Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:SEQuence:COU Nt (see page 586) :TRIGger:SEQuence:COU Nt? (see page 586) ::= integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDG E{1|2} , (see page 587) :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDG E{1|2}? (see page 587) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt ::= integer in NR1 format The :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt command sets the sequencer edge counter resource. The edge counter is used in the trigger stage to determine the number of edges that must be found before the sequencer generates a trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt? The :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt? query returns the current sequencer edge counter setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDGE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDGE{1 | 2} , ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:FIND (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:FIND ::= {PATTern1,ENTered | PATTern1,EXITed | EDGE1 | PATTern1,AND,EDGE1} The :TRIGger:SEQuence:FIND command specifies the find stage of a sequence trigger. This command accepts three program data parameters; you can use NONE to fill out the parameter list (for example,"EDGE1,NONE,NONE"). PATTern1 is specified with the":TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern{1 | 2} , ::= integer or ::= integer or ::= "0xnnnnnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern command defines the specified sequence pattern resource according to the value and the mask. For both and , each bit corresponds to a possible trigger channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:RESet (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:RESet ::= {NONE | PATTern1,ENTered | PATTern1,EXITed | EDGE1 | PATTern1,AND,EDGE1 | PATTern2,ENTered | PATTern2,EXITed | EDGE2 | TIMer} Values used in find and trigger stages are not available. not available if EDGE2,COUNt is used in trigger stage. EDGE2 is The :TRIGger:SEQuence:RESet command specifies the reset stage of a sequence trigger.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer ::= time in seconds in NR1 format The :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer command sets the sequencer timer resource in seconds from 10 ns to 10 s. The timer is used in the reset stage to determine how long to wait for the trigger to occur before restarting. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer? The :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer? query returns current sequencer timer setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:TRIGger (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:TRIGger ::={PATTern2,ENTered | PATTern2,EXITed | EDGE2 | PATTern2,AND,EDGE2 | EDGE2,COUNt | EDGE2,COUNt,NREFind} The :TRIGger:SEQuence:TRIGger command specifies the trigger stage of a sequence trigger. The sequence commands set various search terms. After all of these are found in sequence, the trigger condition itself is searched for.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI Commands Table 89 :TRIGger:SPI Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SL OPe (see page 594) :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SL OPe? (see page 594) ::= {NEGative | POSitive} :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TI Meout (see page 595) :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TI Meout? (see page 595) ::= time in seconds in NR1 format :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing (see page 596) :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing? (see page 596) ::= {CHIPsele
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe ::= {NEGative | POSitive} The :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe command specifies the rising edge (POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative) of the SPI clock source that will clock in the data. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe? The :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe? query returns the current SPI clock source slope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout ::= time in seconds in NR1 format The :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout command sets the SPI signal clock timeout resource in seconds from 500 ns to 10 s when the :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing command is set to TIMeout. The timer is used to frame a signal by a clock timeout.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing ::= {CHIPselect | NOTChipselect | TIMeout} The :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing command sets the SPI trigger framing value. If TIMeout is selected, the timeout value is set by the :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout command. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing? The :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing? query returns the current SPI framing value.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA , ::= integer or ::= integer or ::= "0xnnnnnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA command defines the SPI data pattern resource according to the value and the mask. This pattern, along with the data width, control the data pattern searched for in the data stream.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh ::= integer from 4 to 32 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh command sets the width of the SPI data pattern anywhere from 4 bits to 32 bits. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh? The :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh? query returns the current SPI data pattern width setting.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk command sets the source for the SPI serial clock.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA command sets the source for the SPI serial data.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe command sets the frame source when :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing is set to CHIPselect or NOTChipselect.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV Commands Table 90 :TRIGger:TV Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:TV:LINE (see page 603) :TRIGger:TV:LINE? (see page 603) ::= integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:TV:MODE (see page 604) :TRIGger:TV:MODE? (see page 604) ::= {FIEld1 | FIEld2 | AFIelds | ALINes | LINE | VERTical | LFIeld1 | LFIeld2 | LALTernate | LVERtical} :TRIGger:TV:POLarity (see page 605) :TRIGger:TV:POLarity?
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV:LINE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:LINE ::= integer in NR1 format The :TRIGger:TV:LINE command allows triggering on a specific line of video. The line number limits vary with the standard and mode, as shown in the following table.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV:MODE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:MODE ::= {FIEld1 | FIEld2 | AFIelds | ALINes | LINE | VERTical | LFIeld1 | LFIeld2 | LALTernate | LVERtical} The :TRIGger:TV:MODE command selects the TV trigger mode and field. The LVERtical parameter is only available when :TRIGger:TV:STANdard is GENeric. The LALTernate parameter is not available when :TRIGger:TV:STANdard is GENeric.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:TV:POLarity (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:POLarity ::= {POSitive | NEGative} The :TRIGger:TV:POLarity command sets the polarity for the TV trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:TV:POLarity? The :TRIGger:TV:POLarity? query returns the TV trigger polarity.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:SOURce ::= {CHANnel} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:TV:SOURce command selects the channel used to produce the trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:TV:SOURce? The :TRIGger:TV:SOURce? query returns the current TV trigger source.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV:STANdard (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:STANdard ::= {GENeric | NTSC | PALM | PAL | SECam | {P480L60HZ | P480} | {P720L60HZ | P720} | {P1080L24HZ | P1080} | P1080L25HZ | P1080L50HZ | P1080L60HZ | {I1080L50HZ | I1080} | I1080L60HZ} The :TRIGger:TV:STANdard command selects the video standard. GENeric mode is non- interlaced.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART Commands Table 92 :TRIGger:UART Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:UART:BASE (see page 610) :TRIGger:UART:BASE? (see page 610) ::= {ASCii | HEX} :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrat e (see page 611) :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrat e? (see page 611) ::= integer from 1200 to 3000000 in 100 b/s increments :TRIGger:UART:BITorde r (see page 612) :TRIGger:UART:BITorde r? (see page 612) ::= {LSBFirst
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 92 :TRIGger:UART Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:UART:SOURce: RX (see page 619) :TRIGger:UART:SOURce: RX? (see page 619) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:BASE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BASE ::= {ASCii | HEX} The :TRIGger:UART:BASE command sets the front panel UART/RS232 trigger setup data selection option: • ASCii — front panel data selection is from ASCII values. • HEX — front panel data selection is from hexadecimal values. The :TRIGger:UART:BASE setting does not affect the :TRIGger:UART:DATA command which can always set data values using ASCII or hexadecimal values.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrate (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrate ::= integer from 1200 to 3000000 in 100 b/s increments The :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrate command selects the bit rate (in bps) for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. The baud rate can be set from 1200 b/s to 3 Mb/s in 100 b/s increments. If you enter a baud rate that is not divisible by 100 b/s, the baud rate is set to the nearest baud rate divisible by 100 b/s.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:BITorder (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BITorder ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} The :TRIGger:UART:BITorder command specifies the order of transmission used by the physical Tx and Rx input signals for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. LSBFirst sets the least significant bit of each message "byte" as transmitted first. MSBFirst sets the most significant bit as transmitted first.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:BURSt (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BURSt ::= {OFF | 1 to 4096 in NR1 format} The :TRIGger:UART:BURSt command selects the burst value (Nth frame after idle period) in the range 1 to 4096 or OFF, for the trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BURSt? The :TRIGger:UART:BURSt? query returns the current UART trigger burst value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:DATA (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:DATA ::= 8-bit integer from 0-255 (0x00-0xff) in decimal, , , or format ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:UART:IDLE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:IDLE ::= time from 1 us to 10 s in NR3 format The :TRIGger:UART:IDLE command selects the value of the idle period for burst trigger in the range from 1 us to 10 s when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:IDLE? The :TRIGger:UART:IDLE? query returns the current UART trigger idle period time.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:PARity (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:PARity ::= {EVEN | ODD | NONE} The :TRIGger:UART:PARity command selects the parity to be used with each message "byte" for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:PARity? The :TRIGger:UART:PARity? query returns the current UART parity setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:POLarity (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:POLarity ::= {HIGH | LOW} The :TRIGger:UART:POLarity command selects the polarity as idle low or idle high for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:POLarity? The :TRIGger:UART:POLarity? query returns the current UART polarity setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier ::= {EQUal | NOTequal | GREaterthan | LESSthan} The :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier command selects the data qualifier when :TYPE is set to RDATa, RD1, RD0, RDX, TDATa, TD1, TD0, or TDX for the trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier? The :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier? query returns the current UART trigger qualifier.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:RX (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:RX ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:RX command controls which signal is used as the Rx source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX command controls which signal is used as the Tx source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:UART:TYPE (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:TYPE ::= {RSTArt | RSTOp | RDATa | RD1 | RD0 | RDX | PARityerror | TSTArt | TSTOp | TDATa | TD1 | TD0 | TDX} The :TRIGger:UART:TYPE command selects the UART trigger type. When one of the RD or TD types is selected, the :TRIGger:UART:DATA and :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier commands are used to specify the data value and comparison operator.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh ::= {5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} The :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh command determines the number of bits (5- 9) for each message "byte" for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh? The :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh? query returns the current UART width setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:USB Commands Table 93 :TRIGger:USB Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:D MINus (see page 624) :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:D MINus? (see page 624) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus command sets the source for the USB D- signal.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} for the DSO models ::= {CHANnel | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} for the MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus command sets the source for the USB D+ signal.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:USB:SPEed (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SPEed ::= {LOW | FULL} The :TRIGger:USB:SPEed command sets the expected USB signal speed to be Low Speed (1.5 Mb/s) or Full Speed (12 Mb/s). Query Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SPEed? The :TRIGger:USB:SPEed? query returns the current speed value for the USB signal.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger ::= {SOP | EOP | ENTersuspend | EXITsuspend | RESet} The :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger command sets where the USB trigger will occur: • SOP — Start of packet. • EOP — End of packet. • ENTersuspend — Enter suspend state. • EXITsuspend — Exit suspend state. • RESet — Reset complete. Query Syntax :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger? The :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger? query returns the current USB trigger value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform Commands Provide access to waveform data. See "Introduction to :WAVeform Commands" on page 630.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 94 :WAVeform Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :WAVeform:PREamble? (see page 645) ::= , ,,, , , ,, , ::= an integer in NR1 format: • 0 for BYTE format • 1 for WORD format • 2 for ASCii format ::= an integer in NR1 format: • • • • 0 1 2 3 for for for for NORMal ty
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 94 :WAVeform Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :WAVeform:XINCrement? (see page 658) ::= x-increment in the current preamble in NR3 format n/a :WAVeform:XORigin? (see page 659) ::= x-origin value in the current preamble in NR3 format n/a :WAVeform:XREFerence? (see page 660) ::= 0 (x-reference value in the current preamble in NR1 format) n/a :WAVeform:YINCrement? (see page 661)
5 Commands by Subsystem acquired using NORMal. When the data is acquired using the :DIGitize command (see page 162) or :RUN command (see page 186), the data is placed in the channel buffer of the specified source. Once you have acquired data with the :DIGitize command, the instrument is stopped. If the instrument is restarted (via the programming interface or the front panel), or if any instrument setting is changed, the data acquired with the :DIGitize command may be overwritten.
5 Commands by Subsystem screen and the last value corresponds to the next- to- last time bucket on the right side of the screen. Time buckets without data return 0. The time values for each data point correspond to the position of the data point in the data array. These time values are not transmitted. AVERage Data AVERage data consists of the average of the first n hits in a time bucket, where n is the value returned by the :ACQuire:COUNt query (see page 197).
Commands by Subsystem 5 Word or byte data sent from the oscilloscope must be scaled for useful interpretation. The values used to interpret the data are the X and Y references, X and Y origins, and X and Y increments. These values are read from the waveform preamble. Each channel has its own waveform preamble.
5 Commands by Subsystem Use the :WAVeform:UNSigned command (see page 656) to control whether data values are sent as unsigned or signed integers. This command can be used to match the instrument's internal data type to the data type used by the programming language. This command has no effect if the data format is ASCii.
5 Commands by Subsystem Digital Channel Data (MSO models only) The waveform record for digital channels is similar to that of analog channels. The main difference is that the data points represent either DIGital0,..,7 (POD1), DIGital8,..,15 (POD2), or any grouping of digital channels (BUS1 or BUS2). For digital channels, :WAVeform:UNSigned (see page 656) must be set to ON. Digital Channel POD Data Format Data for digital channels is only available in groups of 8 bits (Pod1 = D0 D7, Pod2 = D8 - D15).
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:BYTeorder (see page 798) Command Syntax :WAVeform:BYTeorder ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} The :WAVeform:BYTeorder command sets the output sequence of the WORD data. The parameter MSBFirst sets the most significant byte to be transmitted first. The parameter LSBFirst sets the least significant byte to be transmitted first. This command affects the transmitting sequence only when :WAVeform:FORMat WORD is selected. The default setting is LSBFirst.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :WAVeform:COUNt (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:COUNt? The :WAVeform:COUNT? query returns the count used to acquire the current waveform. This may differ from current values if the unit has been stopped and its configuration modified. For all acquisition types except average, this value is 1.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:DATA (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:DATA? The :WAVeform:DATA query returns the binary block of sampled data points transmitted using the IEEE 488.2 arbitrary block data format. The binary data is formatted according to the settings of the :WAVeform:UNSigned, :WAVeform:BYTeorder, :WAVeform:FORMat, and :WAVeform:SOURce commands. The number of points returned is controlled by the :WAVeform:POINts command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 ' and the actual waveform data followed by a new line (NL) character. ' The query data has the following format: ' ' ' ' Where: ' = #800001000 (This is an example header) ' The "#8" may be stripped off of the header and the remaining ' numbers are the size, in bytes, of the waveform data block. The ' size can vary depending on the number of points acquired for the ' waveform.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:FORMat (see page 798) Command Syntax :WAVeform:FORMat ::= {WORD | BYTE | ASCii} The :WAVeform:FORMat command sets the data transmission mode for waveform data points. This command controls how the data is formatted when sent from the oscilloscope. • ASCii formatted data converts the internal integer data values to real Y- axis values. Values are transferred as ASCii digits in floating point notation, separated by commas.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:POINts (see page 798) Command Syntax :WAVeform:POINts <# points> <# points> ::= {100 | 250 | 500 | 1000 | } if waveform points mode is NORMal <# points> ::= {100 | 250 | 500 | 1000 | 2000 | 5000 | 10000 | 20000 | 50000 | 100000 | 200000 | 500000 | 1000000 | 2000000 | 4000000 | 8000000 | } if waveform points mode is MAXimum or RAW ::= {NORMal | MAXimum | RAW} NOTE The option is deprecated.
5 Commands by Subsystem NOTE See Also If a full screen of data is not displayed, the number of points returned will not be 1000 or an even divisor of it.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:POINts:MODE (see page 798) Command Syntax :WAVeform:POINts:MODE ::= {NORMal | MAXimum | RAW} The :WAVeform:POINts:MODE command sets the data record to be transferred with the :WAVeform:DATA? query. For the analog or digital sources, there are three different records that can be transferred: • The first is the raw acquisition record. The maximum number of points available in this record is returned by the :ACQuire:POINts? query.
5 Commands by Subsystem • :TIMebase:MODE must be set to MAIN. • :ACQuire:TYPE must be set to NORMal, AVERage, or HRESolution. If AVERage, :ACQuire:COUNt must be set to 1 in order to return more than the measurement record or precision analysis record. • MAXimum or RAW will allow up to 8,000,000 points to be returned. The number of points returned will vary as the instrument's configuration is changed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:PREamble (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:PREamble? The :WAVeform:PREamble query requests the preamble information for the selected waveform source. The preamble data contains information concerning the vertical and horizontal scaling of the data of the corresponding channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem Delay = (#points / 2) * Xincrement + Xorigin Y increment = voltage of 1 Vstep Offset Y origin (V) Y reference = #Vsteps / 2 #Vsteps = 65536 (if format = WORD) 256 (if format = BYTE) X origin (t) X reference = 0 X increment (t) = time between successive points See Also • "Introduction to :WAVeform Commands" on page 630 • ":ACQuire:COUNt" on page 197 • ":ACQuire:POINts" on page 200 • ":ACQuire:TYPE" on page 208 • ":DIGitize" on page 162 • ":WAVeform:COUNt" on page 637 • ":WAVef
Commands by Subsystem ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim TYPE POINTS COUNT XINCREMENT XORIGIN XREFERENCE YINCREMENT YORIGIN YREFERENCE : : : : : : 5 int16 int32 int32 float64 float64 int32 - 0 = NORMAL, 1 = PEAK DETECT, 2 = AVERAGE number of data points transferred. 1 and is always 1. - time difference between data points. - always the first data point in memory. specifies the data point associated with x-origin. : float32 - voltage diff between data points.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt (see page 798) Query Syntax NOTE :WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt? This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. The :WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt query returns the number of memory segments in the acquired data. You can use the :WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt? query while segments are being acquired (although :DIGitize blocks subsequent queries until the full segmented acquisition is complete).
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG (see page 798) Query Syntax NOTE :WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG? This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. The :WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG? query returns the time tag of the currently selected segmented memory index. The index is selected using the :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :WAVeform:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} for DSO models ::= {CHANnel | POD{1 | 2} | BUS{1 | 2} | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} for MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :WAVeform:SOURce command selects the analog channel, function, digital pod, digital bus, or serial decode bus to be used as the
Commands by Subsystem Return Format 5 ::= {CHAN | FUNC | SBUS} for DSO models ::= {CHAN | POD{1 | 2} | BUS{1 | 2} | FUNC | SBUS} for MSO models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models See Also • "Introduction to :WAVeform Commands" on page 630 • ":DIGitize" on page 162 • ":WAVeform:FORMat" on page 640 • ":WAVeform:BYTeorder" on page 636 • ":WAVeform:DATA" on page 638 • ":WAVeform:PREamb
5 Commands by Subsystem ' ' ' ' ' ' ' Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim XORIGIN XREFERENCE YINCREMENT YORIGIN YREFERENCE : float64 - always the first data point in memory. : int32 - specifies the data point associated with x-origin. : float32 - voltage diff between data points. : float32 - value is the voltage at center screen. : int32 - specifies the data point where y-origin occurs.
5 Commands by Subsystem 1000000) + " us" + vbCrLf strOutput = strOutput + "Delay = " + _ FormatNumber(((lngPoints / 2 - lngXReference) * _ dblXIncrement + dblXOrigin) * 1000000) + " us" + vbCrLf ' QUERY_WAVE_DATA - Outputs waveform data that is stored in a buffer. ' Query the oscilloscope for the waveform data. myScope.WriteString ":WAV:DATA?" ' READ_WAVE_DATA - The wave data consists of two parts: the header, ' and the actual waveform data followed by a new line (NL) character.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:SOURce:SUBSource (see page 798) Command Syntax :WAVeform:SOURce:SUBSource ::= {{NONE | RX} | TX} If the :WAVeform:SOURce is SBUS (serial decode), more than one data set may be available, and this command lets you choose from the available data sets. Currently, only UART serial decode lets you get "TX" data. The default, NONE, specifies "RX" data. (RX is an alias for NONE.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :WAVeform:TYPE (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:TYPE? The :WAVeform:TYPE? query returns the acquisition mode associated with the currently selected waveform. The acquisition mode is set by the :ACQuire:TYPE command. Return Format ::= {NORM | PEAK | AVER | HRES} NOTE See Also If the :WAVeform:SOURce is POD1, POD2, or SBUS, the type is always NORM.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:UNSigned (see page 798) Command Syntax :WAVeform:UNSigned ::= {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} The :WAVeform:UNSigned command turns unsigned mode on or off for the currently selected waveform. Use the WAVeform:UNSigned command to control whether data values are sent as unsigned or signed integers. This command can be used to match the instrument's internal data type to the data type used by the programming language.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:VIEW (see page 798) Command Syntax :WAVeform:VIEW ::= {MAIN} The :WAVeform:VIEW command sets the view setting associated with the currently selected waveform. Currently, the only legal value for the view setting is MAIN. Query Syntax :WAVeform:VIEW? The :WAVeform:VIEW? query returns the view setting associated with the currently selected waveform.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:XINCrement (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:XINCrement? The :WAVeform:XINCrement? query returns the x- increment value for the currently specified source. This value is the time difference between consecutive data points in seconds.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :WAVeform:XORigin (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:XORigin? The :WAVeform:XORigin? query returns the x- origin value for the currently specified source. XORigin is the X- axis value of the data point specified by the :WAVeform:XREFerence value. In this product, that is always the X- axis value of the first data point (XREFerence = 0).
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:XREFerence (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:XREFerence? The :WAVeform:XREFerence? query returns the x- reference value for the currently specified source. This value specifies the index of the data point associated with the x- origin data value. In this product, the x- reference point is the first point displayed and XREFerence is always 0.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :WAVeform:YINCrement (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:YINCrement? The :WAVeform:YINCrement? query returns the y- increment value in volts for the currently specified source. This value is the voltage difference between consecutive data values. The y- increment for digital waveforms is always "1".
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:YORigin (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:YORigin? The :WAVeform:YORigin? query returns the y- origin value for the currently specified source. This value is the Y- axis value of the data value specified by the :WAVeform:YREFerence value. For this product, this is the Y- axis value of the center of the screen.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :WAVeform:YREFerence (see page 798) Query Syntax :WAVeform:YREFerence? The :WAVeform:YREFerence? query returns the y- reference value for the currently specified source. This value specifies the data point value where the y- origin occurs. In this product, this is the data point value of the center of the screen. It is undefined if the format is ASCii.
5 664 Commands by Subsystem Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 6 Commands A-Z A 665 B 667 C 667 D 670 E 672 F 672 G 674 H 674 I 675 L 676 M 677 N 680 O 680 P 681 Q 683 R 683 S 685 T 689 U 695 V 696 W 696 X 697 Y 698 A • AALias, ":ACQuire:AALias" on page 195 • ACKNowledge, ":TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge" on page 750 • ":ACQuire:AALias" on page 195 • ":ACQuire:COMPlete" on page 196 • ":ACQuire:COUNt" on page 197 • ":ACQuire:DAALias" on page 198 665
6 Commands A-Z • ":ACQuire:MODE" on page 199 • ":ACQuire:POINts" on page 200 • ":ACQuire:RSIGnal" on page 201 • ":ACQuire:SEGMented:ANALyze" on page 202 • ":ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt" on page 203 • ":ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex" on page 204 • ":ACQuire:SRATe" on page 207 • ":ACQuire:TYPE" on page 208 • ":ACTivity" on page 154 • ADDRess, ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess" on page 557 • ":AER (Arm Event Register)" on page 155 • ALIGnment, ":TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnment" on page 540 • AMASk Commands: • ":MTESt:AMASk:CREate"
Commands A-Z B 6 • BASE Commands: • ":SBUS:M1553:BASE" on page 447 • ":SBUS:UART:BASE" on page 451 • ":TRIGger:UART:BASE" on page 610 • BAUDrate Commands: • ":TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate" on page 497 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate" on page 519 • ":TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate" on page 573 • ":TRIGger:UART:BAUDrate" on page 611 • BIND, ":MTESt:SCALe:BIND" on page 397 • BIT, ":BUS:BIT" on page 212 • BITorder Commands: • ":SBUS:SPI:BITorder" on page 449 • ":TRIGger:UART:BITorder" on page 612 • BITS, "
6 Commands A-Z • CAN Commands: • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:ERRor" on page 434 • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:OVERload" on page 435 • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:RESet" on page 436 • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:TOTal" on page 437 • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:UTILization" on page 438 • ":TRIGger:CAN Commands" on page 490 • CCBASe, ":TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCBase" on page 523 • CCRepetition, ":TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCRepetition" on page 524 • ":CDISplay" on page 161 • CENTer, ":FUNCtion:CENTer" on page 279 • CHANnel, ":TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel" on page 520 • ":C
Commands A-Z 6 • CLEar Commands: • ":BUS:CLEar" on page 215 • ":DISPlay:CLEar" on page 258 • ":MEASure:CLEar" on page 326 • CLOCk Commands: • ":TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:CLOCk" on page 560 • ":TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe" on page 542 • ":TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:CLOCk" on page 549 • ":TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe" on page 594 • ":TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout" on page 595 • ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk" on page 599 • "*CLS (Clear Status)" on page 129 • COMPlete, ":ACQuire:COMPlete" on page 196 • CONDition, ":HWERegister:CONDiti
6 Commands A-Z • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:RXFRames" on page 454 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFRames" on page 455 • ":TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt" on page 508 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt" on page 586 • ":WAVeform:COUNt" on page 637 • ":WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt" on page 648 • COUNter, ":MEASure:COUNter" on page 327 • COUPling Commands: • ":CHANnel:COUPling" on page 233 • ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPling" on page 512 • CREate, ":MTESt:AMASk:CREate" on page 375 D • DAALias, ":ACQuire:DAALias" on page 198 • DATA Commands: • ":DISPlay:
Commands A-Z 6 • ":TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:DEFinition" on page 751 • ":TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinition" on page 752 • DELay Commands: • ":MEASure:DELay" on page 331 • ":TIMebase:DELay" on page 749 • DELete, ":MTESt:DELete" on page 385 • DESTination, ":HARDcopy:DESTination" on page 718 • DEVice, ":HARDcopy:DEVice" on page 719 • ":DIGital:DISPlay" on page 251 • ":DIGital:LABel" on page 252 • ":DIGital:POSition" on page 253 • ":DIGital:SIZE" on page 254 • ":DIGital:THReshold" on page 255 • ":DIGitize
6 Commands A-Z • DUTYcycle, ":MEASure:DUTYcycle" on page 333 E • EBURst, ":TRIGger:EBURst Commands" on page 507 • EDGE Commands: • ":TRIGger[:EDGE] Commands" on page 511 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:EDGE" on page 587 • ENABle":MTESt:ENABle" on page 386 • ":ERASe" on page 713 • ERRor Commands: • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:ERRor" on page 434 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:ERRor" on page 452 • ":SYSTem:ERRor" on page 460 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRor:TYPE" on page 521 • "*ESE (Standard Event Status Enable)" on page 130 • "*ESR (Standard Ev
Commands A-Z 6 • ":HARDcopy:FACTors" on page 297 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors" on page 420 • FALLtime, ":MEASure:FALLtime" on page 334 • FFEed, ":HARDcopy:FFEed" on page 298 • FILename Commands: • ":HARDcopy:FILename" on page 720 • ":RECall:FILename" on page 410 • ":SAVE:FILename" on page 417 • FIND, ":TRIGger:SEQuence:FIND" on page 588 • FLEXray Commands: • ":SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:NULL" on page 440 • ":SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:RESet" on page 441 • ":SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:SYNC" on page 442 • ":SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:TOTal" on
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:ID" on page 525 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:TYPE" on page 526 • ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe" on page 601 • FRAMing Commands: • ":SBUS:UART:FRAMing" on page 456 • ":TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing" on page 596 • FREQuency, ":MEASure:FREQuency" on page 335 • ":FUNCtion:CENTer" on page 279 • ":FUNCtion:DISPlay" on page 280 • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation" on page 281 • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1" on page 282 • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2" on page 283 • ":FUNCtion:OFFSet" on page 284 • ":FUNCti
6 Commands A-Z • ":HARDcopy:APRinter" on page 296 • ":HARDcopy:DESTination" on page 718 • ":HARDcopy:DEVice" on page 719 • ":HARDcopy:FACTors" on page 297 • ":HARDcopy:FFEed" on page 298 • ":HARDcopy:FILename" on page 720 • ":HARDcopy:FORMat" on page 721 • ":HARDcopy:GRAYscale" on page 722 • ":HARDcopy:IGColors" on page 723 • ":HARDcopy:INKSaver" on page 299 • ":HARDcopy:LAYout" on page 300 • ":HARDcopy:PALette" on page 301 • ":HARDcopy:PDRiver" on page 724 • ":HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST" on page 302 • ":HARDc
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:IIC Commands" on page 556 • IGColors Commands: • ":HARDcopy:IGColors" on page 723 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver" on page 422 • IMAGe Commands: • ":RECall:IMAGe[:STARt]" on page 411 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:AREA" on page 419 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors" on page 420 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat" on page 421 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver" on page 422 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:PALette" on page 423 • ":SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt]" on page 418 • IMPedance Commands: • ":CHANnel:IMPedance" on page 235 • ":EXTernal:IMPedance" on page 269
Commands A-Z 6 • LEVel Commands: • ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel" on page 513 • ":TRIGger:GLITch:LEVel" on page 533 • LIN Commands: • ":SBUS:LIN:PARity" on page 446 • ":TRIGger:LIN Commands" on page 565 • LINE, ":TRIGger:TV:LINE" on page 603 • LIST, ":HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST" on page 302 • LISTer Commands: • ":LISTer:DATA" on page 305 • ":LISTer:DISPlay" on page 306 • ":SAVE:LISTer[:STARt]" on page 424 • LOAD, ":MTESt:LOAD" on page 742 • LOCK Commands: • ":MTESt:LOCK" on page 387 • ":SYSTem:LOCK" on page 461 • ":S
6 Commands A-Z • ":RECall:MASK[:STARt]" on page 412 • ":SAVE:MASK[:STARt]" on page 425 • ":MEASure:CLEar" on page 326 • ":MEASure:COUNter" on page 327 • ":MEASure:DEFine" on page 328 • ":MEASure:DELay" on page 331 • ":MEASure:DUTYcycle" on page 333 • ":MEASure:FALLtime" on page 334 • ":MEASure:FREQuency" on page 335 • ":MEASure:LOWer" on page 725 • ":MEASure:NWIDth" on page 336 • ":MEASure:OVERshoot" on page 337 • ":MEASure:PERiod" on page 339 • ":MEASure:PHASe" on page 340 • ":MEASure:PREShoot" on page 3
6 Commands A-Z • ":MEASure:VAMPlitude" on page 358 • ":MEASure:VAVerage" on page 359 • ":MEASure:VBASe" on page 360 • ":MEASure:VDELta" on page 736 • ":MEASure:VMAX" on page 361 • ":MEASure:VMIN" on page 362 • ":MEASure:VPP" on page 363 • ":MEASure:VRATio" on page 364 • ":MEASure:VRMS" on page 365 • ":MEASure:VSTArt" on page 737 • ":MEASure:VSTOp" on page 738 • ":MEASure:VTIMe" on page 366 • ":MEASure:VTOP" on page 367 • ":MEASure:XMAX" on page 368 • ":MEASure:XMIN" on page 369 • MEASure, ":MTESt:RMODe:FA
6 Commands A-Z • ":MTESt:AVERage:COUNt" on page 741 • ":MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms" on page 380 • ":MTESt:COUNt:RESet" on page 381 • ":MTESt:COUNt:TIME" on page 382 • ":MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms" on page 383 • ":MTESt:DATA" on page 384 • ":MTESt:DELete" on page 385 • ":MTESt:ENABle" on page 386 • ":MTESt:LOAD" on page 742 • ":MTESt:LOCK" on page 387 • ":MTESt:OUTPut" on page 388 • ":MTESt:RMODe" on page 389 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure" on page 390 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt" on page 391 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FAC
6 Commands A-Z • ":CHANnel:OFFSet" on page 238 • ":FUNCtion:OFFSet" on page 284 • "*OPC (Operation Complete)" on page 136 • ":OPEE (Operation Status Enable Register)" on page 175 • OPERation Commands: • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation" on page 281 • ":FUNCtion:OPERation" on page 285 • ":OPERegister:CONDition (Operation Status Condition Register)" on page 177 • ":OPERegister[:EVENt] (Operation Status Event Register)" on page 179 • "*OPT (Option Identification)" on page 137 • ORDer, ":DISPlay:ORDer" on page 71
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2" on page 559 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA" on page 568 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth" on page 570 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat" on page 571 • ":TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA" on page 580 • ":TRIGger:PATTern" on page 487 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern" on page 589 • ":TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA" on page 597 • ":TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh" on page 598 • PDRiver, ":HARDcopy:PDRiver" on page 724 • PERiod, ":MEASure:PERiod" on page 339 • PERSistence, ":DISPlay:PERSi
Commands A-Z 6 • PRINter, ":HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST" on page 302 • PROBe Commands: • ":CHANnel:PROBe" on page 239 • ":CHANnel:PROBe:HEAD[:TYPE]" on page 240 • ":CHANnel:PROBe:ID" on page 241 • ":CHANnel:PROBe:SKEW" on page 242 • ":CHANnel:PROBe:STYPe" on page 243 • ":EXTernal:PROBe" on page 270 • PROTection Commands: • ":CHANnel:PROTection" on page 244 • ":EXTernal:PROTection" on page 273 • ":SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK" on page 463 • Pulse Width (GLITch), ":TRIGger:GLITch Commands" on page 529
6 Commands A-Z • ":RECall:MASK[:STARt]" on page 412 • ":RECall:PWD" on page 413 • ":RECall:SETup[:STARt]" on page 414 • REFClock, ":TIMebase:REFClock" on page 472 • REFerence Commands: • ":FUNCtion:REFerence" on page 287 • ":TIMebase:REFerence" on page 473 • REJect, ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect" on page 514 • RESet Commands: • ":MEASure:STATistics:RESet" on page 353 • ":MTESt:COUNt:RESet" on page 381 • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:RESet" on page 436 • ":SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:RESet" on page 441 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:RESet" on p
Commands A-Z 6 • RX, ":TRIGger:UART:SOURce:RX" on page 619 • RXFRames, ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:RXFRames" on page 454 S • SAMPlepoint Commands: • ":TRIGger:CAN:SAMPlepoint" on page 496 • ":TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint" on page 572 • "*SAV (Save)" on page 143 • SAVE Commands: • ":MTESt:AMASk:{SAVE | STORe}" on page 739 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE" on page 392 • ":SAVE:FILename" on page 417 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:AREA" on page 419 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors" on page 420 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat" on page 421 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver"
6 Commands A-Z • ":SBUS:IIC:ASIZe" on page 445 • ":SBUS:LIN:PARity" on page 446 • ":SBUS:M1553:BASE" on page 447 • ":SBUS:MODE" on page 448 • ":SBUS:SPI:BITorder" on page 449 • ":SBUS:SPI:WIDTh" on page 450 • ":SBUS:UART:BASE" on page 451 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:ERRor" on page 452 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:RESet" on page 453 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:RXFRames" on page 454 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFRames" on page 455 • ":SBUS:UART:FRAMing" on page 456 • SCALe Commands: • ":CHANnel:SCALe" on page 246 • ":FUNCtion:SCALe" on
Commands A-Z 6 • ":SYSTem:SETup" on page 464 • SEQuence, ":TRIGger:SEQuence Commands" on page 585 • SHOW, ":MEASure:SHOW" on page 348 • SIGMa, ":MTESt:RMODe:SIGMa" on page 394 • SIGNal Commands: • ":TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate" on page 497 • ":TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:DEFinition" on page 751 • ":TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate" on page 573 • ":TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinition" on page 752 • ":SINGle" on page 188 • SIZE Commands: • ":DIGital:SIZE" on page 254 • ":POD:SIZE" on page 406 • SKEW, ":CHANnel:PROBe:S
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:LIN:SOURce" on page 574 • ":TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer" on page 582 • ":TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer" on page 583 • ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk" on page 599 • ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA" on page 600 • ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe" on page 601 • ":TRIGger:TV:SOURce" on page 606 • ":TRIGger:UART:SOURce:RX" on page 619 • ":TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX" on page 620 • ":TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus" on page 624 • ":TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus" on page 625 • ":WAVeform:SOURce" on page 650 • ":WAVeform:
Commands A-Z 6 • ":RECall:MASK[:STARt]" on page 412 • ":RECall:SETup[:STARt]" on page 414 • ":SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt]" on page 418 • ":SAVE:LISTer[:STARt]" on page 424 • ":SAVE:MASK[:STARt]" on page 425 • ":SAVE:SETup[:STARt]" on page 427 • ":SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt]" on page 428 • STATistics Commands: • ":MEASure:STATistics" on page 351 • ":MEASure:STATistics:INCRement" on page 352 • ":MEASure:STATistics:RESet" on page 353 • STATus Commands: • ":CALibrate:STATus" on page 225 • ":STATus" on page 189 • "*STB (Read
6 Commands A-Z • ":TER (Trigger Event Register)" on page 191 • THReshold Commands: • ":CHANnel:THReshold" on page 707 • ":DIGital:THReshold" on page 255 • ":MEASure:THResholds" on page 728 • ":POD:THReshold" on page 407 • ":TRIGger:THReshold" on page 753 • THResholds, ":MEASure:THResholds" on page 728 • TIME Commands: • ":CALibrate:TIME" on page 228 • ":MTESt:COUNt:TIME" on page 382 • ":MTESt:RMODe:TIME" on page 395 • ":SYSTem:TIME" on page 466 • ":TIMebase:DELay" on page 749 • ":TIMebase:MODE" on p
Commands A-Z 6 • ":TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger" on page 499 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger" on page 528 • ":TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger" on page 552 • ":TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier" on page 562 • ":TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE]" on page 563 • ":TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger" on page 577 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:TRIGger" on page 592 • ":TRIGger:USB:TRIGger" on page 627 • ":TRIGger:HFReject" on page 483 • ":TRIGger:HOLDoff" on page 484 • ":TRIGger:MODE" on page 485 • ":TRIGger:NREJect" on page 486 • ":TRIGger:PATTern" on page 487 • ":TRIGge
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTosetup" on page 518 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate" on page 519 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel" on page 520 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRor:TYPE" on page 521 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:EVENt:TYPE" on page 522 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCBase" on page 523 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCRepetition" on page 524 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:ID" on page 525 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:TYPE" on page 526 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce" on page 527 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger" on page 528 • ":TRIGger:GLIT
Commands A-Z 6 • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2" on page 559 • ":TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:CLOCk" on page 560 • ":TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:DATA" on page 561 • ":TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier" on page 562 • ":TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE]" on page 563 • ":TRIGger:LIN:ID" on page 567 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA" on page 568 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth" on page 570 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat" on page 571 • ":TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint" on page 572 • ":TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate" on page 573 • ":TRIGger:LIN:SIGNa
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA" on page 597 • ":TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh" on page 598 • ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk" on page 599 • ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA" on page 600 • ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe" on page 601 • ":TRIGger:SWEep" on page 489 • ":TRIGger:THReshold" on page 753 • ":TRIGger:TV:LINE" on page 603 • ":TRIGger:TV:MODE" on page 604 • ":TRIGger:TV:POLarity" on page 605 • ":TRIGger:TV:SOURce" on page 606 • ":TRIGger:TV:STANdard" on page 607 • ":TRIGger:TV:TVMode" on page 754 • ":TRIGg
Commands A-Z 6 • TVALue, ":MEASure:TVALue" on page 356 • TVOLt, ":MEASure:TVOLt" on page 733 • TWIDth, ":TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth" on page 554 • TX, ":TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX" on page 620 • TXFRames, ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFRames" on page 455 • TYPE Commands: • ":ACQuire:TYPE" on page 208 • ":CHANnel:PROBe:HEAD[:TYPE]" on page 240 • ":WAVeform:TYPE" on page 655 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRor:TYPE" on page 521 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:EVENt:TYPE" on page 522 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:TYPE" on page 526 • ":TRIGger:IIC:TRIGg
6 Commands A-Z • UNITs Commands: • ":CHANnel:UNITs" on page 247 • ":EXTernal:UNITs" on page 275 • ":MTESt:AMASk:UNITs" on page 377 • UNSigned, ":WAVeform:UNSigned" on page 656 • UPPer Commands: • ":MEASure:UPPer" on page 735 • ":TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer" on page 583 • USB, ":TRIGger:USB Commands" on page 623 • UTILization, ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:UTILization" on page 438 V • VAMPlitude, ":MEASure:VAMPlitude" on page 358 • VAVerage, ":MEASure:VAVerage" on page 359 • VBASe, ":MEASure:VBASe" on page 360 • VDE
Commands A-Z 6 • ":WAVeform:FORMat" on page 640 • ":WAVeform:POINts" on page 641 • ":WAVeform:POINts:MODE" on page 643 • ":WAVeform:PREamble" on page 645 • ":WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt" on page 648 • ":WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG" on page 649 • ":WAVeform:SOURce" on page 650 • ":WAVeform:SOURce:SUBSource" on page 654 • ":WAVeform:TYPE" on page 655 • ":WAVeform:UNSigned" on page 656 • ":WAVeform:VIEW" on page 657 • ":WAVeform:XINCrement" on page 658 • ":WAVeform:XORigin" on page 659 • ":WAVeform:XREFerence" on p
6 Commands A-Z • ":MTESt:SCALe:XDELta" on page 399 • XINCrement, ":WAVeform:XINCrement" on page 658 • XMAX, ":MEASure:XMAX" on page 368 • XMIN, ":MEASure:XMIN" on page 369 • XORigin, ":WAVeform:XORigin" on page 659 • XREFerence, ":WAVeform:XREFerence" on page 660 Y • Y1, ":MTESt:SCALe:Y1" on page 400 • Y1Position, ":MARKer:Y1Position" on page 315 • Y2, ":MTESt:SCALe:Y2" on page 401 • Y2Position, ":MARKer:Y2Position" on page 316 • YDELta Commands: • ":MARKer:YDELta" on page 317 • ":MTESt:AMASk:YDELta" on
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Obsolete commands are older forms of commands that are provided to reduce customer rework for existing systems and programs (see"Obsolete Commands" on page 798).
7 700 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Obsolete Command Current Command Equivalent Behavior Differences :CHANnel:INPut (see page 709) :CHANnel:IMPedance (see page 235) :CHANnel:PMODe (see page 710) none :DISPlay:CONNect (see page 711) :DISPlay:VECTors (see page 265) :DISPlay:ORDer (see page 712) none :ERASe (see page 713) :CDISplay (see page 161) :EXTernal:INPut (see page 714) :EXTernal:IMPedance (see page 269) :EXTernal:PMODe (see page 715) none FUNCtion1, FUNCtion2 :FUNCtio
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Obsolete Command Current Command Equivalent :HARDcopy:PDRiver (see page 724) :HARDcopy:APRinter (see page 296) :MEASure:LOWer (see page 725) :MEASure:DEFine:THResholds (see page 328) :MEASure:SCRatch (see page 726) :MEASure:CLEar (see page 326) :MEASure:TDELta (see page 727) :MARKer:XDELta (see page 314) :MEASure:THResholds (see page 728) :MEASure:DEFine:THResholds (see page 328) :MEASure:TMAX (see page 729) :MEASure:XMAX (see page 368) :MEASure:TMIN (see
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Discontinued Commands 702 Obsolete Command Current Command Equivalent :MTESt:RUMode (see page 743) :MTESt:RMODe (see page 389) :MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure (see page 744) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STO P (see page 393) :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} (see page 745) :RUN (see page 186) or :STOP (see page 190) :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce (see page 746) :TRIGger Commands (see page 479) :PRINt? (see page 747) :DISPlay:DATA? (see page 259) :TIMebase:DELay (see page 749) :TIMebase:POSit
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Discontinued Command Current Command Equivalent Comments CHANnel:PROTect :CHANnel:PROTection (see page 244) Previous form of this command was used to enable/disable 50Ω protection. The new command resets a tripped protect and the query returns the status of TRIPed or NORMal.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Discontinued Parameters 704 Some previous oscilloscope queries returned control setting values of OFF and ON. The InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscopes only return the enumerated values 0 (for off) and 1 (for on).
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :CHANnel:ACTivity (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:ACTivity The :CHANnel:ACTivity command clears the cumulative edge variables for the next activity query. NOTE Query Syntax The :CHANnel:ACTivity command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :ACTivity command (see page 154) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :CHANnel:LABel (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:LABel ::= {CHANnel1 | CHANnel2 | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} ::= quoted ASCII string The :CHANnel:LABel command sets the source text to the string that follows. Setting a channel will also result in the name being added to the label list. NOTE Query Syntax The :CHANnel:LABel command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :CHANnel:THReshold (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:THReshold , [, ] ::= {POD1 | POD2} ::= {CMOS | ECL | TTL | USERdef} ::= voltage for USERdef in NR3 format [volt_type] [volt_type] ::= {V | mV (-3) | uV (-6)} The :CHANnel:THReshold command sets the threshold for a group of channels. The threshold is either set to a predefined value or to a user- defined value.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :CHANnel2:SKEW (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel2:SKEW ::= skew time in NR3 format ::= -100 ns to +100 ns The :CHANnel2:SKEW command sets the skew between channels 1 and 2. The maximum skew is +/- 100 ns. You can use the oscilloscope's analog probe skew control to remove cable delay errors between channel 1 and channel 2.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :CHANnel:INPut (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:INPut ::= {ONEMeg | FIFTy} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:INPut command selects the input impedance setting for the specified channel. The legal values for this command are ONEMeg (1 MΩ) and FIFTy (50Ω).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :CHANnel:PMODe (see page 798) Command Syntax :CHANnel:PMODe ::= {AUTo | MANual} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The probe sense mode is controlled internally and cannot be set. If a probe with sense is connected to the specified channel, auto sensing is enabled; otherwise, the mode is manual.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :DISPlay:CONNect (see page 798) Command Syntax :DISPlay:CONNect ::= {{ 1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :DISPlay:CONNect command turns vectors on and off. When vectors are turned on, the oscilloscope displays lines connecting sampled data points. When vectors are turned off, only the sampled data is displayed. NOTE Query Syntax The :DISPlay:CONNEct command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :DISPlay:ORDer (see page 798) Query Syntax :DISPlay:ORDer? The :DISPlay:ORDer? query returns a list of digital channel numbers in screen order, from top to bottom, separated by commas. Busing is displayed as digital channels with no separator. For example, in the following list, the bus consists of digital channels 4 and 5: DIG1, DIG4 DIG5, DIG7.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :ERASe (see page 798) Command Syntax :ERASe The :ERASe command erases the screen. NOTE The :ERASe command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :CDISplay command (see page 161) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :EXTernal:INPut (see page 798) Command Syntax :EXTernal:INPut ::= {ONEMeg | FIFTy} The :EXTernal:IMPedance command selects the input impedance setting for the external trigger. The legal values for this command are ONEMeg (1 MΩ) and FIFTy (50Ω). NOTE Query Syntax The :EXTernal:INPut command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :EXTernal:IMPedance command (see page 269) instead.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :EXTernal:PMODe (see page 798) Command Syntax :EXTernal:PMODe ::= {AUTo | MANual} The probe sense mode is controlled internally and cannot be set. If a probe with sense is connected to the specified channel, auto sensing is enabled; otherwise, the mode is manual. If the pmode sent matches the oscilloscope's setting, the command will be accepted. Otherwise, a setting conflict error is generated.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :FUNCtion:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | ADD | SUBTract | MULTiply} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :FUNCtion:SOURce command is only used when an FFT (Fast Fourier Transform), DIFF, or INT operation is selected (see the:FUNCtion:OPERation command for more information about selecting an operation).
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :FUNCtion:VIEW (see page 798) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:VIEW ::= {{1 | ON} | (0 | OFF}} The :FUNCtion:VIEW command turns the selected function on or off. When ON is selected, the function performs as specified using the other FUNCtion commands. When OFF is selected, function is neither calculated nor displayed. NOTE Query Syntax The :FUNCtion:VIEW command is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:DESTination (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:DESTination ::= {CENTronics | FLOPpy} The :HARDcopy:DESTination command sets the hardcopy destination. NOTE Query Syntax The :HARDcopy:DESTination command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :HARDcopy:FILename command (see page 720) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:DEVice (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:DEVice ::= {TIFF | GIF | BMP | LASerjet | EPSon | DESKjet | BWDeskjet | SEIKo} The HARDcopy:DEVice command sets the hardcopy device type. NOTE BWDeskjet option refers to the monochrome Deskjet printer. NOTE The :HARDcopy:DEVice command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :HARDcopy:FORMat command (see page 721) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:FILename (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:FILename ::= quoted ASCII string The HARDcopy:FILename command sets the output filename for those print formats whose output is a file. NOTE Query Syntax The :HARDcopy:FILename command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :SAVE:FILename command (see page 417) and :RECall:FILename command (see page 410) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:FORMat (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:FORMat ::= {BMP[24bit] | BMP8bit | PNG | CSV | ASCiixy | BINary | PRINter0 | PRINter1} The HARDcopy:FORMat command sets the hardcopy format type. PRINter0 and PRINter1 are only valid when printers are connected to the oscilloscope's USB ports. (The first printer connected/identified is PRINter0 and the second is PRINter1.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:GRAYscale (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:GRAYscale ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The :HARDcopy:GRAYscale command controls whether grayscaling is performed in the hardcopy dump. NOTE Query Syntax The :HARDcopy:GRAYscale command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :HARDcopy:PALette command (see page 301) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:IGColors (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:IGColors ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The HARDcopy:IGColors command controls whether the graticule colors are inverted or not. NOTE Query Syntax The :HARDcopy:IGColors command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :HARDcopy:INKSaver (see page 299) command instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:PDRiver (see page 798) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:PDRiver ::= {AP2Xxx | AP21xx | {AP2560 | AP25} | {DJ350 | DJ35} | DJ6xx | {DJ630 | DJ63} | DJ6Special | DJ6Photo | DJ8Special | DJ8xx | DJ9Vip | OJPRokx50 | DJ9xx | GVIP | DJ55xx | {PS470 | PS47} {PS100 | PS10} | CLASer | MLASer | LJFastraster | POSTscript} The HARDcopy:PDRiver command sets the hardcopy printer driver used for the selected printer.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:LOWer (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:LOWer The :MEASure:LOWer command sets the lower measurement threshold value. This value and the UPPer value represent absolute values when the thresholds are ABSolute and percentage when the thresholds are PERCent as defined by the :MEASure:DEFine THResholds command. NOTE Query Syntax The :MEASure:LOWer command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:SCRatch (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:SCRatch The :MEASure:SCRatch command clears all selected measurements and markers from the screen. NOTE 726 The :MEASure:SCRatch command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :MEASure:CLEar command (see page 326) instead.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :MEASure:TDELta (see page 798) Query Syntax :MEASure:TDELta? The :MEASure:TDELta? query returns the time difference between the Tstop marker (X2 cursor) and the Tstart marker (X1 cursor). Tdelta = Tstop - Tstart Tstart is the time at the start marker (X1 cursor) and Tstop is the time at the stop marker (X2 cursor). No measurement is made when the :MEASure:TDELta? query is received by the oscilloscope. The delta time value that is output is the current value.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:THResholds (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:THResholds {T1090 | T2080 | VOLTage} The :MEASure:THResholds command selects the thresholds used when making time measurements. NOTE Query Syntax The :MEASure:THResholds command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :MEASure:DEFine THResholds command (see page 328) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:TMAX (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:TMAX [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:TMAX command installs a screen measurement and starts an X- at- Max- Y measurement on the selected waveform. If the optional source is specified, the current source is modified.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:TMIN (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:TMIN [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:TMIN command installs a screen measurement and starts an X- at- Min- Y measurement on the selected waveform. If the optional source is specified, the current source is modified.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :MEASure:TSTArt (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:TSTArt [suffix] ::= time at the start marker in seconds [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :MEASure:TSTArt command moves the start marker (X1 cursor) to the specified time with respect to the trigger time. NOTE The short form of this command, TSTA, does not follow the defined Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules (see page 800).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:TSTOp (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:TSTOp [suffix] ::= time at the stop marker in seconds [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :MEASure:TSTOp command moves the stop marker (X2 cursor) to the specified time with respect to the trigger time. NOTE The short form of this command, TSTO, does not follow the defined Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules (see page 800).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:TVOLt (see page 798) Query Syntax :MEASure:TVOLt? , [][,] ::= the voltage level that the waveform must cross. ::= direction of the waveform. A rising slope is indicated by a plus sign (+). A falling edge is indicated by a minus sign (-). ::= the transition to be reported. If the occurrence number is one, the first crossing is reported. If the number is two, the second crossing is reported, etc.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands ::= time in seconds of the specified voltage crossing in NR3 format 734 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:UPPer (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:UPPer The :MEASure:UPPer command sets the upper measurement threshold value. This value and the LOWer value represent absolute values when the thresholds are ABSolute and percentage when the thresholds are PERCent as defined by the :MEASure:DEFine THResholds command. NOTE Query Syntax The :MEASure:UPPer command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:VDELta (see page 798) Query Syntax :MEASure:VDELta? The :MEASure:VDELta? query returns the voltage difference between vertical marker 1 (Y1 cursor) and vertical marker 2 (Y2 cursor). No measurement is made when the :MEASure:VDELta? query is received by the oscilloscope. The delta value that is returned is the current value. This is the same value as the front- panel cursors delta Y value.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:VSTArt (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VSTArt ::= value for vertical marker 1 The :MEASure:VSTArt command moves the vertical marker (Y1 cursor) to the specified value corresponding to the selected source. The source can be selected by the MARKer:X1Y1source command. NOTE The short form of this command, VSTA, does not follow the defined Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules (see page 800).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:VSTOp (see page 798) Command Syntax :MEASure:VSTOp ::= value for Y2 cursor The :MEASure:VSTOp command moves the vertical marker 2 (Y2 cursor) to the specified value corresponding to the selected source. The source can be selected by the MARKer:X2Y2source command. NOTE The short form of this command, VSTO, does not follow the defined Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules (see page 800).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:AMASk:{SAVE | STORe} (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:{SAVE | STORe} "" The :MTESt:AMASk:SAVE command saves the automask generated mask to a file. If an automask has not been generated, an error occurs. The parameter is an MS- DOS compatible name of the file, a maximum of 254 characters long (including the path name, if used). The filename assumes the present working directory if a path does not precede the file name.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:AVERage (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:AVERage ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:AVERage command enables or disables averaging. When ON, the oscilloscope acquires multiple data values for each time bucket, and averages them. When OFF, averaging is disabled. To set the number of averages, use the :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt command described next.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt ::= an integer from 2 to 65536 in NR1 format The :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt command sets the number of averages for the waveforms. With the AVERage acquisition type, the :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt command specifies the number of data values to be averaged for each time bucket before the acquisition is considered complete for that time bucket.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:LOAD (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:LOAD "" The :MTESt:LOAD command loads the specified mask file. The parameter is an MS- DOS compatible name of the file, a maximum of 254 characters long (including the path name, if used). NOTE See Also The :MTESt:LOAD command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :RECall:MASK[:STARt] command (see page 412) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:RUMode (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RUMode {FORever | TIME, | {WAVeforms,}} ::= from 1 to 86400 in NR3 format ::= number of waveforms in NR1 format from 1 to 1,000,000,000 The :MTESt:RUMode command determines the termination conditions for the mask test. The choices are FORever, TIME, or WAVeforms. • FORever — runs the Mask Test until the test is turned off.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure command enables or disables the Stop On Failure run until criteria. When a mask test is run and a mask violation is detected, the mask test is stopped and the acquisition system is stopped.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} The :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} command starts or stops the acquisition system. NOTE See Also The :MTESt:STARt and :MTESt:STOP commands are obsolete and are provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :RUN command (see page 186) and :STOP command (see page 190) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce (see page 798) Command Syntax :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce command sets the channel to use as the trigger. NOTE Query Syntax The :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :PRINt? (see page 798) Query Syntax :PRINt? [] ::= [][,..,] ::= {COLor | GRAYscale | BMP8bit | BMP} The :PRINt? query pulls image data back over the bus for storage. NOTE The :PRINT command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :DISPlay:DATA command (see page 259) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands NOTE See Also Old Print Option: Is Now: DISK invalid PCL invalid The PRINt? query is not a core command.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :TIMebase:DELay (see page 798) Command Syntax :TIMebase:DELay ::= time in seconds from trigger to the delay reference point on the screen. The valid range for delay settings depends on the time/division setting for the main time base. The :TIMebase:DELay command sets the main time base delay. This delay is the time between the trigger event and the delay reference point on the screen.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge ::= {0 | OFF} This command was used with the N2758A CAN trigger module for 54620/54640 Series mixed- signal oscilloscopes. The InfiniiVision 6000 Series oscilloscopes do not support the N2758A CAN trigger module. Query Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge? The :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge? query returns the current CAN acknowledge setting.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:DEFinition (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:DEFinition ::= {CANH | CANL | RX | TX | DIFFerential} The :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:DEFinition command sets the CAN signal type when :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger is set to SOF (start of frame). These signals can be set to: Dominant high signal: • CANH — the actual CAN_H differential bus signal. Dominant low signals: • CANL — the actual CAN_L differential bus signal.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinition (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinition ::= {LIN | RX | TX} The :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinition command sets the LIN signal type. These signals can be set to: Dominant low signals: • LIN — the actual LIN single- end bus signal line. • RX — the Receive signal from the LIN bus transceiver. • TX — the Transmit signal to the LIN bus transceiver.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :TRIGger:THReshold (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:THReshold , [, ] ::= {POD1 | POD2} ::= {CMOS | ECL | TTL | USERdef} ::= voltage for USERdef (floating-point number) [Volt type] [Volt type] ::= {V | mV | uV} The :TRIGger:THReshold command sets the threshold (trigger level) for a pod of 8 digital channels (either digital channels 0 through 7 or 8 through 15).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :TRIGger:TV:TVMode (see page 798) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:TVMode ::= {FIEld1 | FIEld2 | AFIelds | ALINes | LINE | VERTical | LFIeld1 | LFIeld2 | LALTernate | LVERtical} The :TRIGger:TV:MODE command selects the TV trigger mode and field. The LVERtical parameter is only available when :TRIGger:TV:STANdard is GENeric. The LALTernate parameter is not available when :TRIGger:TV:STANdard is GENeric (see page 607).
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 8 Error Messages -440, Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response -430, Query DEADLOCKED -420, Query UNTERMINATED -410, Query INTERRUPTED -400, Query error -340, Calibration failed -330, Self-test failed -321, Out of memory -320, Storage fault -315, Configuration memory lost 755
8 Error Messages -314, Save/recall memory lost -313, Calibration memory lost -311, Memory error -310, System error -300, Device specific error -278, Macro header not found -277, Macro redefinition not allowed -276, Macro recursion error -273, Illegal macro label -272, Macro execution error -258, Media protected -257, File name error -256, File name not found 756 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Error Messages 8 -255, Directory full -254, Media full -253, Corrupt media -252, Missing media -251, Missing mass storage -250, Mass storage error -241, Hardware missing This message can occur when a feature is unavailable or unlicensed.
8 Error Messages -223, Too much data -222, Data out of range -221, Settings conflict -220, Parameter error -200, Execution error -183, Invalid inside macro definition -181, Invalid outside macro definition -178, Expression data not allowed -171, Invalid expression -170, Expression error -168, Block data not allowed -161, Invalid block data -158, String data not allowed 758 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Error Messages 8 -151, Invalid string data -150, String data error -148, Character data not allowed -138, Suffix not allowed -134, Suffix too long -131, Invalid suffix -128, Numeric data not allowed -124, Too many digits -123, Exponent too large -121, Invalid character in number -120, Numeric data error -114, Header suffix out of range -113, Undefined header Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 759
8 Error Messages -112, Program mnemonic too long -109, Missing parameter -108, Parameter not allowed -105, GET not allowed -104, Data type error -103, Invalid separator -102, Syntax error -101, Invalid character -100, Command error +10, Software Fault Occurred +100, File Exists +101, End-Of-File Found +102, Read Error 760 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
8 Error Messages +103, Write Error +104, Illegal Operation +105, Print Canceled +106, Print Initialization Failed +107, Invalid Trace File +108, Compression Error +109, No Data For Operation A remote operation wants some information, but there is no information available. For example, you may request a stored TIFF image using the :DISPlay:DATA? query, but there may be no image stored.
8 762 Error Messages Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 9 Status Reporting Status Reporting Data Structures 766 Status Byte Register (STB) 769 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) 771 Trigger Event Register (TER) 772 Output Queue 773 Message Queue 774 (Standard) Event Status Register (ESR) 775 (Standard) Event Status Enable Register (ESE) 776 Error Queue 777 Operation Status Event Register (:OPERegister[:EVENt]) 778 Operation Status Condition Register (:OPERegister:CONDition) 779 Arm Event Regi
9 Status Reporting Trigger Event Register Error Queue Message Queue RUN Bit Output Queue (Mask) Arm Event Register Overload Event Register Overload Event Enable Register (Mask) Standard Event Status Register Standard Event Status Enable Register (Mask) Hardware Event Condition/ Event Registers Hardware Event Enable Register Mask Test Event Register Mask Test Event Enable Register Operation Status Condition/ Event Registers Operation Status Enable Register Status Byte Register Service Reque
Status Reporting 9 The bits in the status byte act as summary bits for the data structures residing behind them. In the case of queues, the summary bit is set if the queue is not empty. For registers, the summary bit is set if any enabled bit in the event register is set. The events are enabled with the corresponding event enable register. Events captured by an event register remain set until the register is read or cleared. Registers are read with their associated commands.
9 Status Reporting Status Reporting Data Structures The following figure shows how the status register bits are masked and logically OR'ed to generate service requests (SRQ) on particular events.
9 Status Reporting From Hardware Event Registers From Overload Event Registers From Mask Test Event Registers Arm Reg HWE OVLR 12 HWE OVLR 15 14 13 12 11 10 Run bit set if oscilloscope not stopped Wait Trig Run 9 5 3 MTE Wait Trig Run MTE 11 AER ? 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 :OPERation:CONDition? Operation Status Condition Register :OPERation[:EVENt]? Operation Status Event Register 2 1 0 :OPEE :OPEE? Operation Status Enable (Mask) Register OR + PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQL OPC
9 Status Reporting The status registers picture above shows how the different status reporting data structures work together. To make it possible for any of the Standard Event Status Register bits to generate a summary bit, the bits must be enabled. These bits are enabled by using the *ESE common command to set the corresponding bit in the Standard Event Status Enable Register.
9 Status Reporting Status Byte Register (STB) The Status Byte Register is the summary- level register in the status reporting structure. It contains summary bits that monitor activity in the other status registers and queues. The Status Byte Register is a live register. That is, its summary bits are set and cleared by the presence and absence of a summary bit from other event registers or queues.
9 Status Reporting The next program prints 0xD1 and clears bit 6 (RQS) and bit 4 (MAV) of the Status Byte Register. The difference in the output value between this example and the previous one is the value of bit 6 (weight = 64). Bit 6 is set when the first enabled summary bit is set and is cleared when the Status Byte Register is read by the serial poll command.
Status Reporting 9 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) Setting the Service Request Enable Register bits enable corresponding bits in the Status Byte Register. These enabled bits can then set RQS and MSS (bit 6) in the Status Byte Register. Bits are set in the Service Request Enable Register using the *SRE command and the bits that are set are read with the *SRE? query. Example The following example sets bit 4 (MAV) and bit 5 (ESB) in the Service Request Enable Register. myScope.
9 Status Reporting Trigger Event Register (TER) This register sets the TRG bit in the status byte when a trigger event occurs. The TER event register stays set until it is cleared by reading the register or using the *CLS command. If your application needs to detect multiple triggers, the TER event register must be cleared after each one. If you are using the Service Request to interrupt a program or controller operation, you must clear the event register each time the trigger bit is set.
Status Reporting 9 Output Queue The output queue stores the oscilloscope- to- controller responses that are generated by certain instrument commands and queries. The output queue generates the Message Available summary bit when the output queue contains one or more bytes. This summary bit sets the MAV bit (bit 4) in the Status Byte Register. When using the Agilent VISA COM library, the output queue may be read with the FormattedIO488 object's ReadString, ReadNumber, ReadList, or ReadIEEEBlock methods.
9 Status Reporting Message Queue The message queue contains the text of the last message written to the advisory line on the screen of the oscilloscope. The length of the oscilloscope's message queue is 1. Note that messages sent with the :SYSTem:DSP command do not set the MSG status bit in the Status Byte Register.
9 Status Reporting (Standard) Event Status Register (ESR) The (Standard) Event Status Register (ESR) monitors the following oscilloscope status events: • PON - Power On • URQ - User Request • CME - Command Error • EXE - Execution Error • DDE - Device Dependent Error • QYE - Query Error • RQC - Request Control • OPC - Operation Complete When one of these events occur, the event sets the corresponding bit in the register.
9 Status Reporting (Standard) Event Status Enable Register (ESE) To allow any of the (Standard) Event Status Register (ESR) bits to generate a summary bit, you must first enable that bit. Enable the bit by using the *ESE (Event Status Enable) common command to set the corresponding bit in the (Standard) Event Status Enable Register (ESE). Set bits are read with the *ESE? query. Example Suppose your application requires an interrupt whenever any type of error occurs.
Status Reporting 9 Error Queue As errors are detected, they are placed in an error queue. This queue is first in, first out. If the error queue overflows, the last error in the queue is replaced with error 350, Queue overflow. Any time the queue overflows, the least recent errors remain in the queue, and the most recent error is discarded. The length of the oscilloscope's error queue is 30 (29 positions for the error messages, and 1 position for the Queue overflow message).
9 Status Reporting Operation Status Event Register (:OPERegister[:EVENt]) The Operation Status Event Register register hosts these bits: Name Location Description RUN bit bit 3 Is set whenever the instrument goes from a stop state to a single or running state. WAIT TRIG bit bit 5 Is set by the Trigger Armed Event Register and indicates that the trigger is armed. MTE bit bit 9 Comes from the Mask Test Event Registers. OVLR bit bit 11 Is set whenever a 50Ω input overload occurs.
Status Reporting 9 Operation Status Condition Register (:OPERegister:CONDition) The Operation Status Condition Register register hosts these bits: Name Location Description RUN bit bit 3 Is set whenever the instrument is not stopped. WAIT TRIG bit bit 5 Is set by the Trigger Armed Event Register and indicates that the trigger is armed. MTE bit bit 9 Comes from the Mask Test Event Registers. OVLR bit bit 11 Is set whenever a 50Ω input overload occurs.
9 Status Reporting Arm Event Register (AER) This register sets bit 5 (Wait Trig bit) in the Operation Status Register and the OPER bit (bit 7) in the Status Byte Register when the instrument becomes armed. The ARM event register stays set until it is cleared by reading the register with the AER? query or using the *CLS command. If your application needs to detect multiple triggers, the ARM event register must be cleared after each one.
Status Reporting 9 Overload Event Register (:OVLRegister) The Overload Event Register register hosts these bits: Name Location Description Channel 1 OVL bit 0 Overload has occurred on Channel 1 input. Channel 2 OVL bit 1 Overload has occurred on Channel 2 input. Channel 3 OVL bit 2 Overload has occurred on Channel 3 input. Channel 4 OVL bit 3 Overload has occurred on Channel 4 input. External Trigger OVL bit 4 Overload has occurred on External Trigger input.
9 Status Reporting Hardware Event Event Register (:HWERegister[:EVENt]) This register hosts the Bat On bit (bit 0). • The Bat On bit is set whenever the instrument is operating on battery power.
Status Reporting 9 Hardware Event Condition Register (:HWERegister:CONDition) This register hosts the Bat On bit (bit 0) and the PLL LOCKED bit (bit 12). • The :HWERegister:CONDition? query returns the value of the Hardware Event Condition Register. • The PLL LOCKED bit (bit 12) is for internal use and is not intended for general use. • The Bat On bit is set whenever the instrument is operating on battery power.
9 Status Reporting Mask Test Event Event Register (:MTERegister[:EVENt]) The Mask Test Event Event Register register hosts these bits: Name Location Description Complete bit 0 Is set when the mask test is complete. Fail bit 1 Is set when there is a mask test failure. Started bit 8 Is set when mask testing is started. Auto Mask bit 10 Is set when auto mask creation is completed. The :MTERegister[:EVENt]? query returns the value of, and clears, the Mask Test Event Event Register.
Status Reporting 9 Clearing Registers and Queues The *CLS common command clears all event registers and all queues except the output queue. If *CLS is sent immediately after a program message terminator, the output queue is also cleared.
9 Status Reporting Status Reporting Decision Chart no Do you want to do status reporting? yes Reset the instrument and clear the status registers: myScope.WriteString "*RST" myScope.WriteString "*CLS" Do you want to send a Service Request (SRQ) interrupt to the controller? no (Your programs can read the status registers instead.
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Synchronization in the Programming Flow 788 Blocking Synchronization 789 Polling Synchronization With Timeout 790 Synchronizing with a Single-Shot Device Under Test (DUT) 792 Synchronization with an Averaging Acquisition 794 When remotely controlling an oscilloscope with programming commands, it is often necessary to know when the oscilloscope has finished the previous operation and is ready for the next comma
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Synchronization in the Programming Flow Most remote programming follows these three general steps: 1 Set up the oscilloscope and device under test (see page 788). 2 Acquire a waveform (see page 788). 3 Retrieve results (see page 788). Set Up the Oscilloscope Before making changes to the oscilloscope setup, it is best to make sure it is stopped using the :STOP command followed by the *OPC? query.
Synchronizing Acquisitions 10 Blocking Synchronization Use the :DIGitize command to start the acquisition. This blocks subsequent queries until the acquisition and processing is complete. For example: ' ' Synchronizing acquisition using blocking. ' =================================================================== Option Explicit Public Public Public Public myMgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager myScope As VisaComLib.
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Polling Synchronization With Timeout This example requires a timeout value so the operation can abort if an acquisition does not occur within the timeout period: ' ' Synchronizing acquisition using polling. ' =================================================================== Option Explicit Public Public Public Public myMgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager myScope As VisaComLib.
Synchronizing Acquisitions 10 myScope.WriteString ":OPERegister:CONDition?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Mask RUN bit (bit 3, &H8). If (varQueryResult And &H8) = 0 Then Exit Do Else Sleep 100 ' Small wait to prevent excessive queries. lngElapsed = lngElapsed + 100 End If Loop ' Get results. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------If lngElapsed < lngTimeout Then myScope.WriteString ":MEASure:RISetime" myScope.WriteString ":MEASure:RISetime?" varQueryResult = myScope.
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Synchronizing with a Single-Shot Device Under Test (DUT) The examples in "Blocking Synchronization" on page 789 and "Polling Synchronization With Timeout" on page 790 assume the DUT is continually running and therefore the oscilloscope will have more than one opportunity to trigger. With a single shot DUT, there is only one opportunity for the oscilloscope to trigger, so it is necessary for the oscilloscope to be armed and ready before the DUT is enabled.
Synchronizing Acquisitions 10 ' ----------------------------------------------------------------' Start a single acquisition. myScope.WriteString ":SINGle" ' Wait until the trigger system is armed. Do Sleep 100 ' Small wait to prevent excessive queries. myScope.WriteString ":AER?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber Loop Until varQueryResult = 1 ' Oscilloscope is armed and ready, enable DUT here. Debug.Print "Oscilloscope is armed and ready, enable DUT.
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Synchronization with an Averaging Acquisition When averaging, it is necessary to know when the average count has been reached. The :SINGle command does not average. If it is known that a trigger will occur, a :DIGitize will acquire the complete number of averages, but if the number of averages is large, a timeout on the connection can occur. The example below polls during the :DIGitize to prevent a timeout on the connection. ' ' Synchronizing in averaging acquisition mode.
Synchronizing Acquisitions 10 ' Save *ESE (Standard Event Status Enable register) mask ' (so it can be restored later). Dim varInitialESE As Variant myScope.WriteString "*ESE?" varInitialESE = myScope.ReadNumber ' Set *ESE mask to allow only OPC (Operation Complete) bit. myScope.WriteString "*ESE " + CStr(CInt("&H01")) ' Acquire using :DIGitize. Set up OPC bit to be set when the ' operation is complete. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------myScope.
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions 796 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Command Classifications 798 Valid Command/Query Strings 799 Query Return Values 820 All Oscilloscope Commands Are Sequential 821 797
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Command Classifications To help you use existing programs with your oscilloscope, or use current programs with the next generation of Agilent InfiniiVision oscilloscopes, commands are classified by the following categories: • "Core Commands" on page 798 • "Non- Core Commands" on page 798 • "Obsolete Commands" on page 798 Core Commands Core commands are a common set of commands that provide basic oscilloscope functionality on this oscilloscope and future Agilent InfiniiV
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 Valid Command/Query Strings • "Program Message Syntax" on page 799 • "Command Tree" on page 803 • "Duplicate Mnemonics" on page 817 • "Tree Traversal Rules and Multiple Commands" on page 818 Program Message Syntax To program the instrument remotely, you must understand the command format and structure expected by the instrument. The IEEE 488.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Instruction Header The instruction header is one or more mnemonics separated by colons (:) that represent the operation to be performed by the instrument. The "Command Tree" on page 803 illustrates how all the mnemonics can be joined together to form a complete header. ":DISPlay:LABel ON" is a command. Queries are indicated by adding a question mark (?) to the end of the header, for example, ":DISPlay:LABel?".
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • When the command/keyword is longer than four characters, use the first four characters of the command/keyword unless the fourth character is a vowel; when the fourth character is a vowel, use the first three characters of the command/keyword. • When the command/keyword is four or fewer characters, use all of the characters.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands For example, :CHANnel1:BWLimit ON Common Command Headers Common command headers control IEEE 488.2 functions within the instrument (such as clear status). Their syntax is: * No space or separator is allowed between the asterisk (*) and the command header. *CLS is an example of a common command header. Program Data Syntax Rules Program data is used to convey a parameter information related to the command header.
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 When a syntax definition specifies that a number is an integer, that means that the number should be whole. Any fractional part will be ignored, truncating the number. Numeric data parameters accept fractional values are called real numbers. All numbers must be strings of ASCII characters. Thus, when sending the number 9, you would send a byte representing the ASCII code for the character 9 (which is 57).
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :BIT (see page 212) • :BITS (see page 213) • :CLEar (see page 215) • :DISPlay (see page 216) • :LABel (see page 217) • :MASK (see page 218) • :CALibrate (see page 219) • :DATE (see page 221) • :LABel (see page 222) • :OUTPut (see page 223) • :STARt (see page 224) • :STATus (see page 225) • :SWITch (see page 226) • :TEMPerature (see page 227) • :TIME (see page 228) • :CDISplay (see page 161) • :CHANnel (see page 229) • :BWLimit (see page 232) • :COUPling (see page
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :DISPlay (see page 251) • :LABel (see page 252) • :POSition (see page 253) • :SIZE (see page 254) • :THReshold (see page 255) • :DIGitize (see page 162) • :DISPlay (see page 256) • :CLEar (see page 258) • :DATA (see page 259) • :LABel (see page 261) • :LABList (see page 262) • :PERSistence (see page 263) • :SOURce (see page 264) • :VECTors (see page 265) • :EXTernal (see page 266) • :BWLimit (see page 268) • :IMPedance (see page 269) • :PROBe (see page 270) • :ID (see
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :SOURce1 (see page 289) • :SOURce2 (see page 290) • :SPAN (see page 291) • :WINDow (see page 292) • :HARDcopy (see page 293) • :AREA (see page 295) • :APRinter (see page 296) • :FACTors (see page 297) • :FFEed (see page 298) • :INKSaver (see page 299) • :LAYout (see page 300) • :PALette (see page 301) • [:PRINter] • :LIST (see page 302) • [:STARt] (see page 303) • :HWEenable (Hardware Event Enable Register) (see page 164) • :HWERegister • :CONDition (Hardware Event Con
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :DEFine (see page 328) • :DELay (see page 331) • :DUTYcycle (see page 333) • :FALLtime (see page 334) • :FREQuency (see page 335) • :NWIDth (see page 336) • :OVERshoot (see page 337) • :PERiod (see page 339) • :PHASe (see page 340) • :PREShoot (see page 341) • :PWIDth (see page 342) • :RISetime (see page 346) • :RESults (see page 343) • :SDEViation (see page 347) • :SHOW (see page 348) • :SOURce (see page 349) • :STATistics (see page 351) • :INCRement (see page 352) •
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :MTERegister[:EVENt] (Mask Test Event Event Register) (see page 173) • :MTESt (see page 370) • :AMASk • :CREate (see page 375) • :SOURCe (see page 376) • :UNITs (see page 377) • :XDELta (see page 378) • :YDELta (see page 379) • :COUNt • :FWAVeforms (see page 380) • :RESet (see page 381) • :TIME (see page 382) • :WAVeforms (see page 383) • :DATA (see page 384) • :DELete (see page 385) • :ENABle (see page 386) • :LOCK (see page 387) • :OUTPut (see page 388) • :RMODe (see
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :OPEE (Operation Status Enable Register) (see page 175) • :OPERegister • :CONDition (Operation Status Condition Register) (see page 177) • [:EVENt] (Operation Status Event Register) (see page 179) • :OVLenable (Overload Event Enable Register) (see page 181) • :OVLRegister (Overload Event Register) (see page 183) • :POD (see page 404) • :DISPlay (see page 405) • :SIZE (see page 406) • :THReshold (see page 407) • :RECall • :FILename (see page 410) • :IMAGe (see page
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • [:STARt] (see page 427) • :WAVeform (see page 428) • [:STARt] (see page 428) • :FORMat (see page 429) • :LENGth (see page 430) • :SEGMented (see page 431) • :SBUS (see page 432) • :CAN • :COUNt • :ERRor (see page 434) • :OVERload (see page 435) • :RESet (see page 436) • :TOTal (see page 437) • :UTILization (see page 438) • :DISPlay (see page 439) • :FLEXray • :COUNt • :NULL? (see page 440) • :RESet (see page 441) • :SYNC? (see page 442) • :TOTal? (see page 443) • :I2S
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :COUNt • :ERRor (see page 452) • :RESet (see page 453) • :RXFRames (see page 454) • :TXFRames (see page 455) • :FRAMing (see page 456) • :SERial (see page 187) • :SINGle (see page 188) • :STATus (see page 189) • :STOP (see page 190) • :SYSTem (see page 457) • :DATE (see page 458) • :DSP (see page 459) • :ERRor (see page 460) • :LOCK (see page 461) • :PRECision (see page 462) • :PROTection • :LOCK (see page 445) • :SETup (see page 464) • :TIME (see page 466) • :TER (Tr
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :HOLDoff (see page 484) • :MODE (see page 485) • :NREJect (see page 486) • :PATTern (see page 487) • :SWEep (see page 489) • :CAN (see page 490) • :ACKNowledge (see page 750) • :PATTern • :DATA (see page 492) • :LENGth (see page 493) • :ID (see page 494) • :MODE (see page 495) • :SAMPlepoint (see page 496) • :SIGNal • :BAUDrate (see page 497) • :DEFinition (see page 751) • :SOURce (see page 498) • :TRIGger (see page 499) • :DURation (see page 501) • :GREaterthan (see p
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :AUToset (see page 518) • :BAUDrate (see page 519) • :CHANnel (see page 520) • :ERRor • :TYPE (see page 521) • :EVENt • :TYPE (see page 522) • :FRAMe • :CCBase (see page 523) • :CCRepetition (see page 524) • :ID (see page 525) • :TYPE (see page 526) • :SOURce (see page 527) • :TRIGger (see page 528) • :GLITch (see page 529) • :GREaterthan (see page 531) • :LESSthan (see page 532) • :LEVel (see page 533) • :POLarity (see page 534) • :QUALifier (see page 535) • :RANGe (
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :CLOCk (see page 549) • :DATA (see page 550) • :WSELect (see page 551) • :TRIGger (see page 552) • :TWIDth (see page 554) • :WSLow (see page 555) • :IIC (see page 556) • :PATTern • :ADDRess (see page 557) • :DATA (see page 558) • :DATa2 (see page 559) • :SOURce • :CLOCk (see page 560) • :DATA (see page 561) • :TRIGger • :QUALifier (see page 562) • [:TYPE] (see page 563) • :LIN (see page 565) • :ID (see page 567) • :PATTern • :DATA (see page 568) • :LENGth (see page 570
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :RTA (see page 581) • :SOURce • :LOWer (see page 582) • :UPPer (see page 583) • :TYPE (see page 584) • :MODE (see page 485) • :NREJect (see page 486) • :PATTern (see page 487) • :SEQuence (see page 585) • :COUNt (see page 586) • :EDGE (see page 587) • :FIND (see page 588) • :PATTern (see page 589) • :RESet (see page 590) • :TIMer (see page 591) • :TRIGger (see page 592) • :SPI (see page 593) • :CLOCk • :SLOPe (see page 594) • :TIMeout (see page 595) • :FRAMing (see pa
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :TVMode (see page 754) • :UART (see page 608) • :BASE (see page 610) • :BAUDrate (see page 611) • :BITorder (see page 612) • :BURSt (see page 613) • :DATA (see page 614) • :IDLE (see page 615) • :PARity (see page 616) • :QUALifier (see page 618) • :POLarity (see page 617) • :SOURce • :RX (see page 619) • :TX (see page 620) • :TYPE (see page 621) • :WIDTh (see page 622) • :USB (see page 623) • :SOURce • :DMINus (see page 624) • :DPLus (see page 625) • :SPEed (see page 6
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :SUBSource (see page 654) • :TYPE (see page 655) • :UNSigned (see page 656) • :VIEW (see page 657) • :XINCrement (see page 658) • :XORigin (see page 659) • :XREFerence (see page 660) • :YINCrement (see page 661) • :YORigin (see page 662) • :YREFerence (see page 663) Common Commands (IEEE 488.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands :CHANnel1 and :TIMebase are subsystem selectors and determine which range is being modified. Tree Traversal Rules and Multiple Commands Command headers are created by traversing down the Command Tree (see page 803). A legal command header would be :TIMebase:RANGe. This is referred to as a compound header. A compound header is a header made of two or more mnemonics separated by colons. The mnemonic created contains no spaces.
More About Oscilloscope Commands Example 2: Program Message Terminator Sets Parser Back to Root NOTE 11 myScope.WriteString ":TIMebase:REFerence CENTer;POSition 0.00001" or myScope.WriteString ":TIMebase:REFerence CENTer" myScope.WriteString ":TIMebase:POSition 0.00001" In the first line of example 2, the subsystem selector is implied for the POSition command in the compound command.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Query Return Values Command headers immediately followed by a question mark (?) are queries. Queries are used to get results of measurements made by the instrument or to find out how the instrument is currently configured. After receiving a query, the instrument interrogates the requested function and places the answer in its output queue. The answer remains in the output queue until it is read or another command is issued.
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 All Oscilloscope Commands Are Sequential IEEE 488.2 makes the distinction between sequential and overlapped commands: • Sequential commands finish their task before the execution of the next command starts. • Overlapped commands run concurrently. Commands following an overlapped command may be started before the overlapped command is completed. All of the oscilloscope commands are sequential.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands 822 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 12 Programming Examples VISA COM Examples 824 VISA Examples 857 SICL Examples 903 Example programs are ASCII text files that can be cut from the help file and pasted into your favorite text editor.
12 Programming Examples VISA COM Examples • "VISA COM Example in Visual Basic" on page 824 • "VISA COM Example in C#" on page 834 • "VISA COM Example in Visual Basic .NET" on page 846 VISA COM Example in Visual Basic To run this example in Visual Basic for Applications (VBA): 1 Start the application that provides Visual Basic for Applications (for example, Microsoft Excel). 2 Press ALT+F11 to launch the Visual Basic editor. 3 Reference the Agilent VISA COM library: a Choose Tools>References...
12 Programming Examples ' ' If you are using a different signal or different channels, these ' commands may not work as explained in the comments. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Sub Main() On Error GoTo VisaComError ' Create the VISA COM I/O resource. Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 ' GPIB. 'Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("GPIB0::7::INSTR") ' LAN. 'Set myScope.IO = myMgr.
12 Programming Examples ' There are also some additional initialization commands, which are ' not used, but shown for reference. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Initialize() On Error GoTo VisaComError ' Clear the interface. myScope.IO.Clear ' RESET - This command puts the oscilloscope into a known state. ' This statement is very important for programs to work as expected. ' Most of the following initialization commands are initialized by ' *RST.
Programming Examples 12 ' TRIGGER_EDGE_SLOPE - Sets the slope of the edge for the trigger. ' Set the slope to positive. myScope.WriteString ":TRIGGER:EDGE:SLOPE POSITIVE" ' The following commands are not executed and are shown for reference ' purposes only. To execute these commands, uncomment them. ' RUN_STOP - (not executed in this example) ' - RUN starts the acquisition of data for the active waveform ' display. ' - STOP stops the data acquisition and turns off AUTOSTORE. ' myScope.
12 Programming Examples ' ' NOTE! The DIGITIZE command is highly recommended for triggering ' modes other than SINGLE. This ensures that sufficient data is ' available for measurement. If DIGITIZE is used with single mode, ' the completion criteria may never be met. The number of points ' gathered in Single mode is related to the sweep speed, memory ' depth, and maximum sample rate.
12 Programming Examples Dim strPath As String strPath = "c:\scope\config\setup.dat" Close #1 ' If #1 is open, close it. ' Open file for output. Open strPath For Binary Access Write Lock Write As #1 Put #1, , varQueryResult ' Write data. Close #1 ' Close file. ' IMAGE_TRANSFER - In this example, we will query for the image data ' with ":DISPLAY:DATA?", read the data, and then save it to a file. Dim byteData() As Byte myScope.IO.Timeout = 15000 myScope.
12 Programming Examples ' Query for risetime. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:RISETIME?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Read risetime. MsgBox "Risetime:" + vbCrLf + _ FormatNumber(varQueryResult * 1000000, 4) + " us" ' Query for Peak to Peak voltage. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:VPP?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Read VPP. MsgBox "Peak to peak voltage:" + vbCrLf + _ FormatNumber(varQueryResult, 4) + " V" ' Query for Vmax. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:VMAX?" varQueryResult = myScope.
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim XINCREMENT XORIGIN XREFERENCE YINCREMENT YORIGIN YREFERENCE 12 : float64 - time difference between data points. : float64 - always the first data point in memory. : int32 - specifies the data point associated with x-origin. : float32 - voltage difference between data points. : float32 - value is the voltage at center screen. : int32 - specifies the data point where y-origin occurs.
12 Programming Examples FormatNumber(sngYOrigin) + " V" + vbCrLf strOutput = strOutput + "Sec/Div = " + _ FormatNumber(lngPoints * dblXIncrement / 10 * _ 1000000) + " us" + vbCrLf strOutput = strOutput + "Delay = " + _ FormatNumber(((lngPoints / 2) * _ dblXIncrement + dblXOrigin) * 1000000) + " us" + vbCrLf ' QUERY_WAVE_DATA - Outputs waveform data that is stored in a buffer. ' Query the oscilloscope for the waveform data. myScope.
12 Programming Examples ' Query time at 1st rising edge on ch1. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:TEDGE? +1, CHAN1" ' Read time at edge 1 on ch 1. dblChan1Edge1 = myScope.ReadNumber ' Query time at 1st rising edge on ch2. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:TEDGE? +1, CHAN2" ' Read time at edge 1 on ch 2. dblChan2Edge1 = myScope.ReadNumber ' Calculate delay time between ch1 and ch2. dblDelay = dblChan2Edge1 - dblChan1Edge1 ' Write calculated delay time to screen.
12 Programming Examples myScope.FlushWrite (False) myScope.FlushRead End If Exit Sub VisaComError: MsgBox "VISA COM Error: " + vbCrLf + Err.Description End Sub VISA COM Example in C# To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual C#, Windows, Console Application project. 3 Cut- and- paste the code that follows into the C# source file. 4 Edit the program to use the VISA address of your oscilloscope. 5 Add a reference to the VISA COM 3.
12 Programming Examples private static VisaComInstrument myScope; public static void Main(string[] args) { try { myScope = new VisaComInstrument("USB0::2391::5957::MY47250010::0::INSTR"); Initialize(); /* The extras function contains miscellaneous commands that * do not need to be executed for the proper operation of * this example. The commands in the extras function are * shown for reference purposes only. */ // Extra(); // Uncomment to execute the extra function. Capture(); Analyze(); } catch (System.
12 Programming Examples myScope.DoCommand("*CLS"); // Clear the status data structures. /* IDN - Ask for the device's *IDN string. */ strResults = myScope.DoQueryString("*IDN?"); // Display results. Console.Write("Result is: {0}", strResults); /* AUTOSCALE - This command evaluates all the input signals * and sets the correct conditions to display all of the * active signals. */ myScope.DoCommand(":AUToscale"); /* CHANNEL_PROBE - Sets the probe attenuation factor for the * selected channel.
Programming Examples 12 * Extra() * -------------------------------------------------------------* The commands in this function are not executed and are shown * for reference purposes only. To execute these commands, call * this function from main. */ private static void Extra() { /* RUN_STOP (not executed in this example): * - RUN starts the acquisition of data for the active * waveform display. * - STOP stops the data acquisition and turns off AUTOSTORE. */ myScope.DoCommand(":RUN"); myScope.
12 Programming Examples /* NOTE! The use of the DIGITIZE command is highly recommended * as it will ensure that sufficient data is available for * measurement. Keep in mind when the oscilloscope is running, * communication with the computer interrupts data acquisition. * Setting up the oscilloscope over the bus causes the data * buffers to be cleared and internal hardware to be * reconfigured.
Programming Examples 12 byte[] DataArray; // Read setup string from file. DataArray = File.ReadAllBytes("c:\\scope\\config\\setup.dat"); Console.WriteLine("Read setup string ({0} bytes) from file.", DataArray.Length); // Restore setup string. myScope.DoCommandIEEEBlock(":SYSTem:SETup", DataArray); Console.WriteLine("Restored setup string."); /* IMAGE_TRANSFER - In this example, we query for the screen * data with the ":DISPLAY:DATA?" query. The .
12 Programming Examples * obtain waveform data, you must specify the WAVEFORM * parameters for the waveform data prior to sending the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query. * * Once these parameters have been sent, the * ":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" query provides information concerning * the vertical and horizontal scaling of the waveform data. * * With the preamble information you can then use the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query and read the data block in the * correct format.
Programming Examples 12 Console.WriteLine("Preamble TYPE: {0:e}", fType); double fPoints = fResultsArray[2]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble POINts: {0:e}", fPoints); double fCount = fResultsArray[3]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble COUNt: {0:e}", fCount); double fXincrement = fResultsArray[4]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble XINCrement: {0:e}", fXincrement); double fXorigin = fResultsArray[5]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble XORigin: {0:e}", fXorigin); double fXreference = fResultsArray[6]; Console.
12 Programming Examples double double double double fVdiv = 32 * fYincrement; fOffset = fYorigin; fSdiv = fPoints * fXincrement / 10; fDelay = (fPoints / 2) * fXincrement + fXorigin; // Print them out... Console.WriteLine("Scope Settings for Channel 1:"); Console.WriteLine("Volts per Division = {0:f}", fVdiv); Console.WriteLine("Offset = {0:f}", fOffset); Console.WriteLine("Seconds per Division = {0:e}", fSdiv); Console.
Programming Examples 12 // Clear the interface. m_IoObject.IO.Clear(); } public void DoCommand(string strCommand) { // Send the command. m_IoObject.WriteString(strCommand, true); // Check for instrument errors. CheckForInstrumentErrors(strCommand); } public string DoQueryString(string strQuery) { // Send the query. m_IoObject.WriteString(strQuery, true); // Get the result string. string strResults; strResults = m_IoObject.ReadString(); // Check for instrument errors.
12 Programming Examples // Check for instrument errors. CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery); // Return result numbers. return fResultsArray; } public byte[] DoQueryIEEEBlock(string strQuery) { // Send the query. m_IoObject.WriteString(strQuery, true); // Get the results array. byte[] ResultsArray; ResultsArray = (byte[])m_IoObject.ReadIEEEBlock( IEEEBinaryType.BinaryType_UI1, false, true); // Check for instrument errors. CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery); // Return results array.
Programming Examples 12 } } while (strInstrumentError.ToString() != "+0,\"No error\"\n"); } private void OpenIo() { m_ResourceManager = new ResourceManagerClass(); m_IoObject = new FormattedIO488Class(); // Open the default VISA COM IO object. try { m_IoObject.IO = (IMessage)m_ResourceManager.Open(m_strVisaAddress, AccessMode.NO_LOCK, 0, ""); } catch (Exception e) { Console.WriteLine("An error occurred: {0}", e.Message); } } public void SetTimeoutSeconds(int nSeconds) { m_IoObject.IO.
12 Programming Examples VISA COM Example in Visual Basic .NET To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual Basic, Windows, Console Application project. 3 Cut- and- paste the code that follows into the C# source file. 4 Edit the program to use the VISA address of your oscilloscope. 5 Add a reference to the VISA COM 3.
12 Programming Examples ' do not need to be executed for the proper operation of ' this example. The commands in the extras function are ' shown for reference purposes only. ' Extra(); // Uncomment to execute the extra function. Capture() Analyze() Catch err As System.ApplicationException Console.WriteLine("*** VISA Error Message : " + err.Message) Catch err As System.SystemException Console.WriteLine("*** System Error Message : " + err.Message) Catch err As System.Exception System.Diagnostics.Debug.
12 Programming Examples ' The range value is eight times the volts per division. myScope.DoCommand(":CHANnel1:RANGe 8") ' TIME_RANGE - Sets the full scale horizontal time in seconds. ' The range value is ten times the time per division. myScope.DoCommand(":TIMebase:RANGe 2e-3") ' TIME_REFERENCE - Possible values are LEFT and CENTER: ' - LEFT sets the display reference one time division from ' the left. ' - CENTER sets the display reference to the center of the ' screen. myScope.
Programming Examples 12 ' TIME_MODE (not executed in this example) - Set the time base ' mode to MAIN, DELAYED, XY or ROLL. ' myScope.DoCommand(":TIMebase:MODE MAIN") End Sub ' ' ' ' Capture() -------------------------------------------------------------This function prepares the scope for data acquisition and then uses the DIGITIZE MACRO to capture some data. Private Shared Sub Capture() ' AQUIRE_TYPE - Sets the acquisition mode. There are three ' acquisition types NORMAL, PEAK, or AVERAGE. myScope.
12 Programming Examples Dim nBytes As Integer ' SAVE_SYSTEM_SETUP - The :SYSTem:SETup? query returns a ' program message that contains the current state of the ' instrument. Its format is a definite-length binary block, ' for example, ' #800002204 ' where the setup string is 2204 bytes in length. Console.WriteLine("Saving oscilloscope setup to " + _ "c:\scope\config\setup.dat") If File.Exists("c:\scope\config\setup.dat") Then File.Delete("c:\scope\config\setup.
Programming Examples 12 Console.WriteLine("Wrote screen image ({0} bytes) to file.", _ nBytes) ' Return I/O timeout to five seconds. myScope.SetTimeoutSeconds(5) ' MEASURE - The commands in the MEASURE subsystem are used to ' make measurements on displayed waveforms. ' Set source to measure. myScope.DoCommand(":MEASure:SOURce CHANnel1") ' Query for frequency. Dim fResults As Double fResults = myScope.DoQueryValue(":MEASure:FREQuency?") Console.
12 Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' COUNT : int32 - 1 and is always 1. XINCREMENT : float64 - time difference between data points. XORIGIN : float64 - always the first data point in memory. XREFERENCE : int32 - specifies the data point associated with the x-origin. YINCREMENT : float32 - voltage difference between data points. YORIGIN : float32 - value of the voltage at center screen. YREFERENCE : int32 - data point where y-origin occurs. Console.WriteLine("Reading preamble.
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 12 Where: = #800002048 (this is an example header) The "#8" may be stripped off of the header and the remaining numbers are the size, in bytes, of the waveform data block. The size can vary depending on the number of points acquired for the waveform which can be set using the ":WAVEFORM:POINTS" command. You may then read that number of bytes from the oscilloscope; then, read the following NL character to terminate the query. ' Read waveform data.
12 Programming Examples "c:\scope\data\waveform.csv.", nBytes) End Sub End Class Class VisaComInstrument Private m_ResourceManager As ResourceManagerClass Private m_IoObject As FormattedIO488Class Private m_strVisaAddress As String ' Constructor. Public Sub New(ByVal strVisaAddress As String) ' Save VISA address in member variable. m_strVisaAddress = strVisaAddress ' Open the default VISA COM IO object. OpenIo() ' Clear the interface. m_IoObject.IO.
Programming Examples 12 Return fResult End Function Public Function DoQueryValues(ByVal strQuery As String) As Double() ' Send the query. m_IoObject.WriteString(strQuery, True) ' Get the result numbers. Dim fResultsArray As Double() fResultsArray = _ m_IoObject.ReadList(IEEEASCIIType.ASCIIType_R8, ",;") ' Check for instrument errors. CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery) ' Return result numbers.
12 Programming Examples ' If there is an error, print it. If strInstrumentError.ToString() <> "+0,""No error""" _ & Chr(10) & "" Then If bFirstError Then ' Print the command that caused the error. Console.WriteLine("ERROR(s) for command '{0}': ", _ strCommand) bFirstError = False End If Console.Write(strInstrumentError) End If Loop While strInstrumentError.
Programming Examples 12 VISA Examples • "VISA Example in C" on page 857 • "VISA Example in Visual Basic" on page 866 • "VISA Example in C#" on page 876 • "VISA Example in Visual Basic .NET" on page 889 VISA Example in C To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual C++, Win32, Win32 Console Application project. 3 In the Win32 Application Wizard, click Next >. Then, check Empty project, and click Finish.
12 Programming Examples * This program illustrates most of the commonly-used programming * features of your Agilent oscilloscope. * This program is to be built as a WIN32 console application. * Edit the RESOURCE line to specify the address of the * applicable device. */ #include #include /* For printf(). */ /* Agilent VISA routines.
Programming Examples 12 * The commands in the extras function are shown for reference * purposes only. */ /* extra(); */ /* <-- Uncomment to execute the extra function */ capture(); analyze(); /* Close session */ viClose(vi); viClose(defaultRM); printf ("Program execution is complete...\n"); } /* * initialize * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function initializes both the interface and the oscilloscope * to a known state.
12 Programming Examples * The range value is ten times the time per division. */ viPrintf(vi, ":TIM:RANG 2e-3\n"); /* TIME_REFERENCE - Possible values are LEFT and CENTER: * - LEFT sets the display reference one time division from the * left. * - CENTER sets the display reference to the center of the screen. */ viPrintf(vi, ":TIMEBASE:REFERENCE CENTER\n"); /* TRIGGER_SOURCE - Selects the channel that actually produces the * TV trigger. Any channel can be selected.
12 Programming Examples viPrintf(vi, ":TIMEBASE:MODE MAIN\n"); } /* * capture * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function prepares the scope for data acquisition and then * uses the DIGITIZE MACRO to capture some data. */ void capture (void) { /* AQUIRE_TYPE - Sets the acquisition mode. There are three * acquisition types NORMAL, PEAK, or AVERAGE.
12 Programming Examples int i; /* Loop counter. */ unsigned char setup_string[SETUP_STR_SIZE]; /* Array for setup string. */ int setup_size; FILE *fp; unsigned char image_data[IMG_SIZE]; /* Array for image data. */ int img_size; /* SAVE_SYSTEM_SETUP - The :SYSTEM:SETUP? query returns a program * message that contains the current state of the instrument. Its * format is a definite-length binary block, for example, * #800002204 * where the setup string is 2204 bytes in length.
Programming Examples 12 /* MEASURE - The commands in the MEASURE subsystem are used to * make measurements on displayed waveforms. */ /* Set source to measure. */ viPrintf(vi, ":MEASURE:SOURCE CHANNEL1\n"); /* Query for frequency. */ viQueryf(vi, ":MEASURE:FREQUENCY?\n", "%lf", &frequency); printf("The frequency is: %.4f kHz\n", frequency / 1000); /* Query for peak to peak voltage. */ viQueryf(vi, ":MEASURE:VPP?\n", "%lf", &vpp); printf("The peak to peak voltage is: %.
12 Programming Examples * * Once these parameters have been sent, the ":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" * query provides information concerning the vertical and horizontal * scaling of the waveform data. * * With the preamble information you can then use the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query and read the data block in the * correct format. */ /* WAVE_FORMAT - Sets the data transmission mode for waveform data * output.
Programming Examples 12 * specified with the ":WAVEFORM:SOURCE" command. */ viPrintf(vi, ":WAVEFORM:DATA?\n"); /* Query waveform data. */ /* READ_WAVE_DATA - The wave data consists of two parts: the header, * and the actual waveform data followed by an New Line (NL) * character.
12 Programming Examples * retrieve_waveform * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function retrieves previously saved waveform data from a * file called "wave.dat". */ void retrieve_waveform(void) { FILE *fp; fp = fopen("c:\\scope\\data\\wave.dat", "rb"); /* Read preamble. */ fread(preamble, sizeof(preamble[0]), 10, fp); /* Read the waveform data.
Programming Examples 12 ' Declare variables to hold numeric values returned by ' viVScanf/viVQueryf. Public dblQueryResult As Double Public Const ByteArraySize = 5000000 Public retCount As Long Public byteArray(ByteArraySize) As Byte Public paramsArray(2) As Long Public Const DblArraySize = 20 Public dblArray(DblArraySize) As Double ' Declare fixed length string variable to hold string value returned ' by viVScanf/viVQueryf. Public strQueryResult As String * 200 ' For Sleep subroutine.
12 Programming Examples ' Get and display the device's *IDN? string. strQueryResult = DoQueryString("*IDN?") MsgBox "*IDN? string: " + strQueryResult, vbOKOnly, "*IDN? Result" ' Clear status and load the default setup. DoCommand "*CLS" DoCommand "*RST" End Sub ' ' Capture the waveform. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Capture() ' Set probe attenuation factor (from 0.1 to 1000).
Programming Examples 12 ' Open file for output. Dim hFile As Long hFile = FreeFile Open strPath For Binary Access Write Lock Write As hFile Dim lngI As Long For lngI = 0 To lngSetupStringSize - 1 Put hFile, , byteArray(lngI) ' Write data. Next lngI Close hFile ' Close file. ' Change settings with individual commands: ' ----------------------------------------------------------------' Set vertical scale and offset. DoCommand ":CHANnel1:SCALe 0.05" Debug.
12 Programming Examples ' Analyze the captured waveform. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Analyze() ' Make a couple of measurements. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------DoCommand ":MEASure:SOURce CHANnel1" Debug.
Programming Examples 12 Debug.Print "Waveform points desired: " + _ DoQueryString(":WAVeform:POINts?") ' Set the waveform source. DoCommand ":WAVeform:SOURce CHANnel1" Debug.Print "Waveform source: " + _ DoQueryString(":WAVeform:SOURce?") ' Choose the format of the data returned (WORD, BYTE, ASCII): DoCommand ":WAVeform:FORMat BYTE" Debug.
12 Programming Examples FormatNumber(lngPoints, 0) Debug.Print "Waveform average count: " + _ FormatNumber(lngCount, 0) Debug.Print "Waveform X increment: " + _ Format(dblXIncrement, "Scientific") Debug.Print "Waveform X origin: " + _ Format(dblXOrigin, "Scientific") Debug.Print "Waveform X reference: " + _ FormatNumber(lngXReference, 0) Debug.Print "Waveform Y increment: " + _ Format(sngYIncrement, "Scientific") Debug.Print "Waveform Y origin: " + _ Format(sngYOrigin, "Scientific") Debug.
Programming Examples 12 err = viVPrintf(vi, command + vbLf, 0) If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi CheckInstrumentErrors End Sub Private Function DoCommandIEEEBlock(command As String, _ lngBlockSize As Long) retCount = lngBlockSize Dim strCommandAndLength As String strCommandAndLength = command + " %#" + _ Format(lngBlockSize) + "b" err = viVPrintf(vi, strCommandAndLength + vbLf, paramsArray(1)) If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi DoCommandIEEEBlock = retCount CheckInstrumentErrors E
12 Programming Examples Private Function DoQueryNumbers(query As String) As Long Dim dblResult As Double ' Send query. err = viVPrintf(vi, query + vbLf, 0) If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi ' Set up paramsArray for multiple parameter query returning array. paramsArray(0) = VarPtr(retCount) paramsArray(1) = VarPtr(dblArray(0)) ' Set retCount to max number of elements array can hold. retCount = DblArraySize ' Read numbers.
12 Programming Examples Private Sub CheckInstrumentErrors() On Error GoTo ErrorHandler Dim strErrVal As String * 200 Dim strOut As String err = viVPrintf(vi, ":SYSTem:ERRor?" + vbLf, 0) If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi ' Query any errors. err = viVScanf(vi, "%t", strErrVal) ' Read: Errnum,"Error String". If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi While Val(strErrVal) <> 0 ' End if find: 0,"No Error".
12 Programming Examples End Sub VISA Example in C# To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual C#, Windows, Console Application project. 3 Cut- and- paste the code that follows into the C# source file. 4 Edit the program to use the VISA address of your oscilloscope.
Programming Examples 12 { try { oscp = new VisaInstrument("USB0::2391::5957::MY47250010::0::INSTR"); Initialize(); /* The extras function contains miscellaneous commands that * do not need to be executed for the proper operation of * this example. The commands in the extras function are * shown for reference purposes only. */ // Extra(); // Uncomment to execute the extra function. Capture(); Analyze(); } catch (System.ApplicationException err) { Console.WriteLine("*** VISA Error Message : " + err.
12 Programming Examples */ strResults = oscp.DoQueryString("*IDN?"); // Display results. Console.Write("Result is: {0}", strResults); /* AUTOSCALE - This command evaluates all the input signals * and sets the correct conditions to display all of the * active signals. */ oscp.DoCommand(":AUToscale"); /* CHANNEL_PROBE - Sets the probe attenuation factor for the * selected channel. The probe attenuation factor may be from * 0.1 to 1000. */ oscp.
Programming Examples 12 * for reference purposes only. To execute these commands, call * this function from main. */ private static void Extra() { /* RUN_STOP (not executed in this example): * - RUN starts the acquisition of data for the active * waveform display. * - STOP stops the data acquisition and turns off AUTOSTORE. */ oscp.DoCommand(":RUN"); oscp.DoCommand(":STOP"); /* VIEW_BLANK (not executed in this example): * - VIEW turns on (starts displaying) an active channel or * pixel memory.
12 Programming Examples * communication with the computer interrupts data acquisition. * Setting up the oscilloscope over the bus causes the data * buffers to be cleared and internal hardware to be * reconfigured. * If a measurement is immediately requested there may not have * been enough time for the data acquisition process to collect * data and the results may not be accurate. An error value of * 9.9E+37 may be returned over the bus in this situation. */ oscp.
Programming Examples 12 // Read setup string from file. DataArray = File.ReadAllBytes("c:\\scope\\config\\setup.dat"); Console.WriteLine("Read setup string ({0} bytes) from file.", DataArray.Length); // Restore setup string. nBytesWritten = oscp.DoCommandIEEEBlock(":SYSTem:SETup", DataArray); Console.WriteLine("Restored setup string ({0} bytes).", nBytesWritten); /* IMAGE_TRANSFER - In this example, we query for the screen * data with the ":DISPLAY:DATA?" query. The .
12 Programming Examples * parameters for the waveform data prior to sending the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query. * * Once these parameters have been sent, the * ":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" query provides information concerning * the vertical and horizontal scaling of the waveform data. * * With the preamble information you can then use the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query and read the data block in the * correct format. */ /* WAVE_FORMAT - Sets the data transmission mode for waveform * data output.
Programming Examples 12 double fPoints = fResultsArray[2]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble POINts: {0:e}", fPoints); double fCount = fResultsArray[3]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble COUNt: {0:e}", fCount); double fXincrement = fResultsArray[4]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble XINCrement: {0:e}", fXincrement); double fXorigin = fResultsArray[5]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble XORigin: {0:e}", fXorigin); double fXreference = fResultsArray[6]; Console.
12 Programming Examples double fOffset = fYorigin; double fSdiv = fPoints * fXincrement / 10; double fDelay = (fPoints / 2) * fXincrement + fXorigin; // Print them out... Console.WriteLine("Scope Settings for Channel 1:"); Console.WriteLine("Volts per Division = {0:f}", fVdiv); Console.WriteLine("Offset = {0:f}", fOffset); Console.WriteLine("Seconds per Division = {0:e}", fSdiv); Console.
Programming Examples 12 } public void DoCommand(string strCommand) { // Send the command. VisaSendCommandOrQuery(strCommand); // Check for instrument errors (another command and result). CheckForInstrumentErrors(strCommand); } public int DoCommandIEEEBlock(string strCommand, byte[] DataArray) { // Send the command to the device. string strCommandAndLength; int nViStatus, nLength, nBytesWritten; nLength = DataArray.Length; strCommandAndLength = String.
12 Programming Examples public double DoQueryValue(string strQuery) { // Send the query. VisaSendCommandOrQuery(strQuery); // Get the result string. double fResults; fResults = VisaGetResultValue(); // Check for instrument errors (another command and result). CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery); // Return string results. return fResults; } public double[] DoQueryValues(string strQuery) { // Send the query. VisaSendCommandOrQuery(strQuery); // Get the result string.
Programming Examples 12 strInstrumentError = VisaGetResultString(); if (strInstrumentError.ToString() != "+0,\"No error\"\n") { if (bFirstError) { Console.WriteLine("ERROR(s) for command '{0}': ", strCommand); bFirstError = false; } Console.Write(strInstrumentError); } } while (strInstrumentError.ToString() != "+0,\"No error\"\n"); } private void VisaSendCommandOrQuery(string strCommandOrQuery) { // Send command or query to the device. string strWithNewline; strWithNewline = String.
12 Programming Examples fResultsArray); CheckVisaStatus(nViStatus); return fResultsArray; } private int VisaGetResultIEEEBlock(out byte[] ResultsArray) { // Results array, big enough to hold a PNG. ResultsArray = new byte[300000]; int length; // Number of bytes returned from instrument. // Set the default number of bytes that will be contained in // the ResultsArray to 300,000 (300kB). length = 300000; // Read return value string from the device. int nViStatus; nViStatus = visa32.
Programming Examples 12 public void CheckVisaStatus(int nViStatus) { // If VISA error, throw exception. if (nViStatus < visa32.VI_SUCCESS) { StringBuilder strError = new StringBuilder(256); visa32.viStatusDesc(this.m_nResourceManager, nViStatus, strError); throw new ApplicationException(strError.ToString()); } } public void Close() { if (m_nSession != 0) visa32.viClose(m_nSession); if (m_nResourceManager != 0) visa32.viClose(m_nResourceManager); } } } VISA Example in Visual Basic .
12 Programming Examples 6 Build and run the program. For more information, see the tutorial on using VISA in Microsoft .NET in the VISA Help that comes with Agilent IO Libraries Suite 15. ' ' ' ' ' ' Agilent VISA Example in Visual Basic .NET ------------------------------------------------------------------This program illustrates most of the commonly-used programming features of your Agilent oscilloscope. ------------------------------------------------------------------- Imports System Imports System.
Programming Examples 12 Private Shared Sub Initialize() Dim strResults As StringBuilder ' ' ' ' ' ' RESET - This command puts the oscilloscope into a known state. This statement is very important for programs to work as expected. Most of the following initialization commands are initialized by *RST. It is not necessary to reinitialize them unless the default setting is not suitable for your application. ' Reset the to the defaults. oscp.DoCommand("*RST") ' Clear the status data structures. oscp.
12 Programming Examples oscp.DoCommand(":TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe POSitive") End Sub ' ' ' ' ' Extra() -------------------------------------------------------------The commands in this function are not executed and are shown for reference purposes only. To execute these commands, call this function from main. Private Shared Sub Extra() ' RUN_STOP (not executed in this example): ' - RUN starts the acquisition of data for the active ' waveform display.
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 12 as it will ensure that sufficient data is available for measurement. Keep in mind when the oscilloscope is running, communication with the computer interrupts data acquisition. Setting up the oscilloscope over the bus causes the data buffers to be cleared and internal hardware to be reconfigured. If a measurement is immediately requested there may not have been enough time for the data acquisition process to collect data and the results may not be accurate.
12 Programming Examples ' Read setup string from file. DataArray = File.ReadAllBytes("c:\scope\config\setup.dat") Console.WriteLine("Read setup string ({0} bytes) from file.", _ DataArray.Length) ' Restore setup string. nBytesWritten = oscp.DoCommandIEEEBlock(":SYSTem:SETup", _ DataArray) Console.WriteLine("Restored setup string ({0} bytes).", _ nBytesWritten) ' IMAGE_TRANSFER - In this example, we query for the screen ' data with the ":DISPLAY:DATA?" query. The .
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' parameters for the waveform data prior to sending the ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query. ' ' ' ' WAVE_FORMAT - Sets the data transmission mode for waveform data output. This command controls how the data is formatted when sent from the oscilloscope and can be set to WORD or BYTE format. 12 Once these parameters have been sent, the ":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" query provides information concerning the vertical and horizontal scaling of the waveform data.
12 Programming Examples Dim fCount As Double = fResultsArray(3) Console.WriteLine("Preamble COUNt: {0:e}", fCount) Dim fXincrement As Double = fResultsArray(4) Console.WriteLine("Preamble XINCrement: {0:e}", fXincrement) Dim fXorigin As Double = fResultsArray(5) Console.WriteLine("Preamble XORigin: {0:e}", fXorigin) Dim fXreference As Double = fResultsArray(6) Console.WriteLine("Preamble XREFerence: {0:e}", fXreference) Dim fYincrement As Double = fResultsArray(7) Console.
Programming Examples 12 Console.WriteLine("Offset = {0:f}", fOffset) Console.WriteLine("Seconds per Division = {0:e}", fSdiv) Console.WriteLine("Delay = {0:e}", fDelay) ' Print the waveform voltage at selected points: Dim i As Integer = 0 While i < 1000 Console.
12 Programming Examples ' Check for instrument errors (another command and result). CheckForInstrumentErrors(strCommand) End Sub Public Function DoCommandIEEEBlock(ByVal strCommand As String, _ ByVal DataArray As Byte()) As Integer ' Send the command to the device. Dim strCommandAndLength As String Dim nViStatus As Integer Dim nLength As Integer Dim nBytesWritten As Integer nLength = DataArray.Length strCommandAndLength = [String].
Programming Examples 12 Dim fResults As Double fResults = VisaGetResultValue() ' Check for instrument errors (another command and result). CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery) ' Return string results. Return fResults End Function Public Function DoQueryValues(ByVal strQuery As String) As Double() ' Send the query. VisaSendCommandOrQuery(strQuery) ' Get the result string. Dim fResultsArray As Double() fResultsArray = VisaGetResultValues() ' Check for instrument errors (another command and result).
12 Programming Examples Console.Write(strInstrumentError) End If Loop While strInstrumentError.ToString() <> _ "+0,""No error""" & Chr(10) & "" End Sub Private Sub VisaSendCommandOrQuery(ByVal strCommandOrQuery _ As String) ' Send command or query to the device. Dim strWithNewline As String strWithNewline = [String].Format("{0}" & Chr(10) & "", _ strCommandOrQuery) Dim nViStatus As Integer nViStatus = visa32.
Programming Examples 12 ' Number of bytes returned from instrument. ' Set the default number of bytes that will be contained in ' the ResultsArray to 300,000 (300kB). length = 300000 ' Read return value string from the device. Dim nViStatus As Integer nViStatus = visa32.viScanf(m_nSession, "%#b", length, _ ResultsArray) CheckVisaStatus(nViStatus) ' Write and read buffers need to be flushed after IEEE block? nViStatus = visa32.viFlush(m_nSession, visa32.
12 Programming Examples If m_nResourceManager <> 0 Then visa32.
Programming Examples 12 SICL Examples • "SICL Example in C" on page 903 • "SICL Example in Visual Basic" on page 912 SICL Example in C To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual C++, Win32, Win32 Console Application project. 3 In the Win32 Application Wizard, click Next >. Then, check Empty project, and click Finish. 4 Cut- and- paste the code that follows into a file named "example.c" in the project directory.
12 Programming Examples * Edit the DEVICE_ADDRESS line to specify the address of the * applicable device. */ #include #include "sicl.h" /* For printf(). */ /* SICL routines.
Programming Examples 12 /* Clear the interface. */ iclear(id); iremote(id); } initialize(); /* The extras function contains miscellaneous commands that do not * need to be executed for the proper operation of this example. * The commands in the extras function are shown for reference * purposes only. */ /* extra(); */ /* <-- Uncomment to execute the extra function */ capture(); analyze(); /* Close the device session to the instrument. */ iclose(id); printf ("Program execution is complete...
12 Programming Examples */ iprintf(id, ":AUTOSCALE\n"); /* CHANNEL_PROBE - Sets the probe attenuation factor for the * selected channel. The probe attenuation factor may be from * 0.1 to 1000. */ iprintf(id, ":CHAN1:PROBE 10\n"); /* CHANNEL_RANGE - Sets the full scale vertical range in volts. * The range value is eight times the volts per division. */ iprintf(id, ":CHANNEL1:RANGE 8\n"); /* TIME_RANGE - Sets the full scale horizontal time in seconds. * The range value is ten times the time per division.
Programming Examples 12 iprintf(id, ":RUN\n"); iprintf(id, ":STOP\n"); /* VIEW_BLANK (not executed in this example): * - VIEW turns on (starts displaying) an active channel or pixel * memory. * - BLANK turns off (stops displaying) a specified channel or * pixel memory. */ iprintf(id, ":BLANK CHANNEL1\n"); iprintf(id, ":VIEW CHANNEL1\n"); /* TIME_MODE (not executed in this example) - Set the time base * mode to MAIN, DELAYED, XY or ROLL.
12 Programming Examples /* * analyze * -----------------------------------------------------------------* In this example we will do the following: * - Save the system setup to a file for restoration at a later time. * - Save the oscilloscope display to a file which can be printed. * - Make single channel measurements. */ void analyze (void) { double frequency, vpp; /* Measurements. */ double vdiv, off, sdiv, delay; /* Calculated from preamble data. */ int i; /* Loop counter. */ /* Array for setup string.
12 Programming Examples itimeout(id, 30000); printf("Transferring image to c:\\scope\\data\\screen.bmp\n"); img_size = IMG_SIZE; ipromptf(id, ":DISPLAY:DATA? BMP8bit, SCREEN, COLOR\n", "%#b\n", &img_size, image_data); printf("Read display data query (%d bytes).\n", img_size); /* Write image data to file. */ fp = fopen ("c:\\scope\\data\\screen.bmp", "wb"); img_size = fwrite(image_data, sizeof(unsigned char), img_size, fp); fclose (fp); printf("Wrote image data (%d bytes) to file.
12 Programming Examples * get_waveform * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function transfers the data displayed on the oscilloscope to * the computer for storage, plotting, or further analysis. */ void get_waveform (void) { int waveform_size; /* WAVEFORM_DATA - To obtain waveform data, you must specify the * WAVEFORM parameters for the waveform data prior to sending the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query.
Programming Examples printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble */ 12 TYPE: %e\n", preamble[1]); POINTS: %e\n", preamble[2]); COUNT: %e\n", preamble[3]); XINCREMENT: %e\n", preamble[4]); XORIGIN: %e\n", preamble[5]); XREFERENCE: %e\n", preamble[6]); YINCREMENT: %e\n", preamble[7]); YORIGIN: %e\n", preamble[8]); YREFERENCE: %e\n", preamble[9]); /* QUERY_WAVE_DATA - Outputs waveform records to the
12 Programming Examples { FILE *fp; fp = fopen("c:\\scope\\data\\wave.dat", "wb"); /* Write preamble. */ fwrite(preamble, sizeof(preamble[0]), 10, fp); /* Write actually waveform data. */ fwrite(waveform_data, sizeof(waveform_data[0]), (int)preamble[2], fp); fclose (fp); } /* * retrieve_waveform * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function retrieves previously saved waveform data from a * file called "wave.dat".
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' 12 Agilent SICL Example in Visual Basic ------------------------------------------------------------------This program illustrates a few commonly-used programming features of your Agilent oscilloscope. ------------------------------------------------------------------- Option Explicit Public id As Integer ' Session to instrument. ' Declare variables to hold numeric values returned by ' ivscanf/ifread.
12 Programming Examples ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Initialize() On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Clear the interface. Call iclear(id) ' Get and display the device's *IDN? string. strQueryResult = DoQueryString("*IDN?") MsgBox "Result is: " + RTrim(strQueryResult), vbOKOnly, "*IDN? Result" ' Clear status and load the default setup.
Programming Examples 12 ' Or, configure the settings with individual commands: ' ----------------------------------------------------------------' Set trigger mode and input source. DoCommand ":TRIGger:MODE EDGE" Debug.Print "Trigger mode: " + _ DoQueryString(":TRIGger:MODE?") ' Set EDGE trigger parameters. DoCommand ":TRIGger:EDGE:SOURCe CHANnel1" Debug.Print "Trigger edge source: " + _ DoQueryString(":TRIGger:EDGE:SOURce?") DoCommand ":TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel 1.5" Debug.
12 Programming Examples Debug.Print "Setup bytes restored: " + CStr(lngRestored) ' Acquire data. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------DoCommand ":DIGitize" Exit Sub ErrorHandler: MsgBox "*** Error : " + Error, vbExclamation End End Sub ' ' Analyze the captured waveform. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Analyze() On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Make a couple of measurements.
Programming Examples 12 Close hFile ' Close file. MsgBox "Screen image written to " + strPath ' Download waveform data. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------Dim lngPoints As Long Dim dblXIncrement As Double Dim dblXOrigin As Double Dim dblYIncrement As Double Dim dblYOrigin As Double Dim dblYReference As Double ' Set the waveform source. DoCommand ":WAVeform:SOURce CHANnel1" Debug.
12 Programming Examples ' Set up output file: strPath = "c:\scope\data\waveform_data.csv" ' Open file for output. Open strPath For Output Access Write Lock Write As hFile ' Output waveform data in CSV format. Dim lngDataValue As Long For lngI = 10 To lngNumBytes - 2 ' Skip past 10-byte header. lngDataValue = CLng(byteArray(lngI)) ' Write time value, voltage value.
Programming Examples 12 Call ivprintf(id, command + " ") ' Write definite-length block bytes. Call ifwrite(id, byteArray(), lngBlockSize, vbNull, retCount) ' retCount is now actual number of bytes written.
12 Programming Examples End Function Private Function DoQueryIEEEBlock_Bytes(query As String) As Long On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Send query. Call ivprintf(id, query + vbLf) ' Read definite-length block bytes. Call ifread(id, byteArray(), ByteArraySize, vbNull, retCount) ' retCount is now actual number of bytes returned by read.
Index Symbols +9.9E+37, infinity representation, 820 +9.
Index BYTeorder, 636 C C, SICL library example, 903 C, VISA library example, 857 C#, VISA COM example, 834 C#, VISA example, 876 CAL PROTECT switch, 219, 226 calculating preshoot of waveform, 341 calculating the waveform overshoot, 337 calibrate, 221, 222, 226, 228 CALibrate commands, 219 calibrate date, 221 calibrate introduction, 219 calibrate label, 222 calibrate output, 223 calibrate start, 224 calibrate status, 225 calibrate switch, 226 calibrate temperature, 227 calibrate time, 228 CAN, 492 CAN ackn
Index create automask, 375 CSV (Comma Separated Values) hardcopy format, 721 CSV (Comma Separated Values) waveform data format, 429 cumulative edge activity, 705 current logic levels on digital channels, 154 current oscilloscope configuration, 135, 139, 143, 464 current probe, 247, 275 CURRent segment waveform save option, 431 cursor mode, 309 cursor position, 310, 312, 314, 315, 317 cursor readout, 727, 731, 732 cursor reset conditions, 140 cursor source, 311, 313 cursor time, 727, 731, 732 cursors track
Index edges in measurement, 329 elapsed time in mask test, 382 ellipsis, 121 enable channel labels, 261 enabling calibration, 226 enabling channel display, 234 enabling status register bits, 130, 144 end of string (EOS) terminator, 800 end of text (EOT) terminator, 800 end or identify (EOI), 800 enter pattern, 487 EOI (end or identify), 800 EOS (end of string) terminator, 800 EOT (end of text) terminator, 800 Epson, 719 equivalent-time acquisition mode, 194, 199 erase data, 161, 258 erase functions, 161 er
Index glitch trigger duration, 531 glitch trigger polarity, 534 glitch trigger source, 531 GOFT commands, 674 GPIB interface, 49, 50 graphics, 259 graticule area for hardcopy print, 295 graticule area for saved image, 419 graticule colors, invert for hardcopy, 299, 723 graticule colors, invert for image, 422 graticule data, 259 grayscale palette for hardcopy, 301 grayscale palette for image, 423 grayscaling on hardcopy, 722 greater than qualifier, 535 greater than time, 502, 506, 531, 536 GREaterthan comma
Index L label, 252, 706 label command, bus, 217 LABel commands, 676 label list, 237, 262 labels, 237, 261, 262 labels to store calibration information, 222 labels, specifying, 256 LAN interface, 49, 52 LAN Settings softkey, 50 landscape layout for hardcopy, 300 language for program examples, 57 LaserJet, 719 layout for hardcopy, 300 leakage into peak spectrum, 292 learn string, 135, 464 least significant byte first, 636 left reference, 473 legal values for channel offset, 238 legal values for frequency spa
Index measurements, thresholds, 728 measurements, time between start and stop markers, 727 measurements, time between trigger and edge, 354 measurements, time between trigger and vertical value, 356 measurements, time between trigger and voltage level, 733 measurements, upper threshold value, 735 measurements, vertical amplitude, 358 measurements, vertical peak-to-peak, 363 measurements, voltage difference, 736 memory setup, 143, 464 merge, 170 message available bit, 147 message available bit clear, 129 me
Index pattern data, LIN, 568 pattern duration, 502, 503, 531, 532 pattern format, I2S, 545 pattern format, LIN, 571 pattern length, 493, 570 pattern trigger, 487 pattern triggering, 480 pattern width, 598 peak data, 632 peak detect, 208 peak detect acquisition type, 194, 632 peaks, 278 peak-to-peak vertical value measurement, 363 pending operations, 136 percent of waveform overshoot, 337 percent thresholds, 329 period measured to calculate phase, 340 period measurement, 59, 324, 339 persistence, waveform,
Index report transition, 354, 356 reporting status, 763 reporting the setup, 481 request service, 147 Request-for-OPC flag clear, 129 reset, 140, 590 RESet commands, 684 reset conditions, 140 reset mask statistics, 381 reset measurements, 161, 258 resolution of printed copy, 722 resource session object, 61 ResourceManager object, 61 restore configurations, 135, 139, 143, 464 restore labels, 261 restore setup, 139 return values, query, 820 returning acquisition type, 208 returning number of data points, 200
Index SPI trigger frame, 601 SPI triggering, 481 square root math function, 285 SRE (Service Request Enable Register), 145, 771 SRQ (Service Request interrupt), 164, 171, 175 STANdard commands, 688 standard deviation measured on waveform, 347 Standard Event Status Enable Register (ESE), 130, 776 Standard Event Status Register (ESR), 132, 775 standard for video, 607 standard, LIN, 575 start acquisition, 148, 162, 186, 188 start and stop edges, 329 STARt commands, 688 start cursor, 731 start measurement, 324
Index trigger qualifier, UART, 618 trigger reset conditions, 140 TRIGger SEQuence commands, 585 trigger SPI clock slope, 594 TRIGger SPI commands, 593 trigger status bit, 191 trigger sweep mode, 479 TRIGger TV commands, 602 trigger type, UART, 621 TRIGger UART commands, 608 TRIGger USB commands, 623 trigger, CAN, 499 trigger, CAN acknowledge, 750 trigger, CAN pattern data, 492 trigger, CAN pattern data length, 493 trigger, CAN pattern ID, 494 trigger, CAN pattern ID mode, 495 trigger, CAN sample point, 496
Index USB trigger commands, 623 USB triggering, 481 user defined channel labels, 237 user defined threshold, 707 user event conditions occurred, 147 User's Guide, 4 user-defined threshold voltage for digital channels, 255 user-defined trigger threshold, 753 USR (User Event bit), 145, 147 Utility button, 49, 50 utilization, CAN bus, 438 V valid command strings, 799 valid pattern time, 502, 503 value, 356 value measured at base of waveform, 360 value measured at specified time, 366 value measured at top of
Index Y-reference, 663 Z zero values in waveform data, 638 zoomed time base, 469 zoomed time base mode, how autoscale affects, 156 zoomed window horizontal scale, 478 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 933
Index 934 Agilent InfiniiVision 6000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide